Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Site Construction Manual
"5 � r�/�:r^;s. Ate,,- { - l ��� � �-4Jl• .��, �' ��� .ram �• �n� - '��. 3 I I 1 Site Con,stru'ction-, w.all�>y p 3 9 RESOURCES Office of Regulatory Affairs and Manufactured Housing US Department of Housing and Urban Development 451 Seventh Street, SW, Room 9164 Washington, DC 20410-8000 Telephone: (202) 708-6423 or (800) 927-2891 FAX: (202) 708-4213 State Administrative Agencies A list of SAAs may be found on the web at www.hud.aov/offices/hsa/sfh/mhs/mhssaa cfm or by contacting the Of- fice of Regulatory Affairs and Manufactured Housing or in the Homeowners Manual. FEDERAL PREEMPTION This home was engineered, constructed and inspected in conformance with the Federal Manufactured Home Construction and Safety Standards of the US Department of Housing and Urban Development (24 CFR Part 3280, commonly referred to as the "HUD Code") in effect on the date of construction. These Standards set forth minimum requirements for the de- sign and construction of manufactured homes designed to be used as dwellings. Individual states, counties and cities shall have no authority to establish standards regarding the construction or safety of a manufactured home. A metal certification label is affixed to each section of the home to certify that it has been con- structed and inspected -to comply with'these Standards. The design plans and•in-plant construction of all homes are in- spected by independent third party agencies to assure compliance with the Standards. The installation of the home and any alterations made to the home shall conform to the requirements of the Federal Manufactured Home Construction and Safety Standards and the HUD Model Manufactured Home Installation Standards. These installation instructions are minimum requirements. Applicable local or state laws may have more stringent installa- tion requirements than outlined in this manual and must be followed. Consult with the local authority having jurisdiction (LAHJ) for regulations that may require licenses and/or permits or which may affect procedures described in this manual. DEFINITIONS ANCHOR ASSEMBLY. Any device or other means designed to transfer home anchoring loads to the ground. ANCHORING EQUIPMENT. Ties, straps, cables, turnbuckles, chains, and other approved components, including tension- ing devices that are used to secure a home to anchor assemblies. ANCHORING SYSTEM. A combination of anchoring equipment and anchor assemblies that will, when properly designed and installed, resist the uplift, overturning, and lateral forces on the home. BASEMENT. A load bearing perimeter wall foundation that includes habitable space (finished or unfinished, heated or unheated) completely or partially below grade. CONCRETE ANCHOR. A specific anchoring assembly device designed to transfer home anchoring tension loads from straps to concrete foundation or slab system. CRAWLSPACE. The space underneath the home's floor system, enclosed with either load- or non -load bearing perimeter walls. The ground may be covered with a concrete slab or by a plastic ground cover. Crawlspace walls must be vent- ed and an access must be provided. CROSSOVERS. Utility interconnections between sections of multi -section homes, including heating and cooling ducts, electrical circuits, and water pipes, drain plumbing, and gas lines. DATA PLATE. An information sheet located on a cabinet door under the kitchen sink or on a wall panel or door face near the electrical panel, utility room or in the master bedroom closet. It contains a unique identification number and identi- fies the wind zone, roof load zone, and climatic zone for which the home was constructed. DIAGONAL TIE. A tie intended to resist horizontal or shear forces, but which may resist vertical, uplift, and overturning forces. FOOTING. That portion of the support system that transmits loads directly to the soil. GROUND ANCHOR. A specific anchoring assembly device designed to transfer home loads to the ground. H-BEAM. Steel H-beams, also called cross beams, are often used to support a home over a basement or crawlspace. They span across the foundation from sidewall to sidewall, typically with an intermediate support pier and footing (typ- ically in the center point resulting in a line of piers under the centerline of a double section home). INFORMATION PACKET. A set of important documents provided with the home including warranties, information on high wind coverage, and other features of the specific home. 2 Introduction This installation manual contains instructions that must be followed for the proper installation of the home. It complies with the HUD Installation Standards. Please read all instructions and any other documents (including addendum pages and supplements) that may apply to the specific home prior to commencing site work or installation. This installation manual covers permits and site work through final inspection of the installation. It covers both single and multi -section homes installed over pier and anchor and load bearing crawl space walls. It contains instructions, including specifications and procedures, for the set and hookup of homes to be used as single-family dwellings. The importance of correct installation cannot be over -emphasized Correct installation is absolutely essential to homeowner satisfaction and the structural integrity of the home All instructions must be followed to provide the customer with a safe, quality home. No manual can cover all circumstances that may exist for certain home designs or building sites. For questions, further clarification or if you encounter conditions at the site or in the design of the home or its foundation not covered by this ma- nual, please contact the manufacturer, a,registered engineer or registered architect. Supplemental addendum pages may be included with this manual. Supplements include requirements not covered in this manual or that supercede the manual instructions. Once the home installation is complete, leave this manual with the home. IMPORTANT NOTICES • The home manufacturer is not responsible for installation or for the materials supplied by the set-up crew at the time of installation. The installer may be responsible for any deviations from the installation instructions of this manual. • To keep the home in compliance with its warranty, the home installation must follow the procedures described in this manual or other procedures approved by the manufacturer. Deviation from the instructions in this manual may void the home's warranty. Any alterations or changes to the home shall be approved by a registered engi- neer or registered architect and may still be subject to warranty violations. • When an installer does not provide support and anchorage in accordance with the approved manufacturer's in- stallation instructions, or encounters site conditions (such as areas that are subject to flood damage or high seismic risk) or other conditions that prevent the use of the instructions provided in this manual, the installer must obtain special site -specific instructions from the manufacturer or use a design approved by a registered engineer or registered architect. Designs provided by registered professional engineers or registered architects must also be approved by the manufacturer and DAPIA. Alternative support and anchorage designs may be used which are state approved and acceptable to the local authority having jurisdiction. SAFETY There are potential hazards associated with the installation of a manufactured home. Home installers are licensed and, as experienced professionals, should recognize these hazards, be qualified to work with them, and be capable of providing safe work practices and equipment that minimize the risks of injury. Only qualified persons should install a manufactured home. The installer must possess a valid installation license as a manufactured home installer. As qualified professionals in the field of home installation, installers are the experts and must be aware of the hazards and conditions faced. Warnings are published throughout this manual as reminders. These reminders may not cover all hazards, all potential hazards, or all possible consequences of improper or unsafe installation practices. Construction crews should be trained in the skills required and be supervised by experienced personnel. Installers should regularly inspect work preformed by crews and subcontractors. Obey OSHA regulations, particularly those related to home construction, such as Title 29 Code of Regulations Part 1926. For copies of OSHA regulations, call (202) 512-1800 or visit www.osha.gov on the web. Table 27 Skirting and Ventilation Specifications 113 v Table 28 Foundation Ventilation ��113:� Appendix List Appendix _ Description _ v W Page No. B _Cooling Equipment Sizing Guidelines _ C Storm Shutter Installation D__-_--Hinged Roof w Others Plant,SpecificAddendum Pages Please refer to Appendix for any plant specific details that may supplement or supersede information listed in the following installation manual. The following is a list of revisions to this manual since the 2018 version: Page 20 - revised introduction and added approval to use manual for unreinforced strip and slab footings Page 21 - revised first bullet point and added language regarding additional factory installed floor joists Page 33 - added language for unreinforced strip and slab footings Page 44 - corrected order of Steps 7 & 8 Page 72 - revised 2. Fasten Walls instructions Page 95 - 98 - added Aluminum or Copper -Clad Aluminum Conductor chart Page 99 - revised water heater drain instructions Page 105 - revised dryer vent connection instructions 4 LIST OF FIGURES (cont.) Figure No. Description Page No. Figure No. Description Page No. Figure 59 Tie Down Strap Splice 92 Figure 69 Whole House Ventilation Flex Duct 104 Figure 60 Str P#o Beam, Connection, 92, Figure 70 Open Figure 61 Procedure for Connecting the Strap 93 Figure 71 Ducts Connecting Exterior Heating 105 to Frame and Anchor and/or Cooling Equipment to Home Figure 62' 'L-o'n-git'-d&'i'n'-a'l'�Fra--m- e' A'richor'Xttach- `93 Figiiiiti 'CIoth&s'Dry6r,_Ventilation Ductwork,, 'or,Ext6riorWall 105, ment Method through Floor Figure 63 Marriage Line Tie Down Connec- 94 Figure 73 Chimney and Combustion Air Intake 107 tions Duct Installation Figure 64 Electrical, Feeder Connection when 95, ear , ance 107;,' Meter is on a Post or Pole, Figure 65 Meter Base Wiring when the Meter 97 Figure 75 Roof Flashing and Shingle Installation 108 is on the Home Around Chimney -n Figure 66 Wat6r.Systern Connection "98 Figure7 , 6 Exterior Li_qhting Co nectibh 109._1 Figure 67 Water Heater Drip Pan and Drain 99 Figure 77 Wiring for Ceiling Fan or Chain -Hung 110 Light w/maximum Weight Gas ervic( C on 11% Fig dire 66 nectiom, lot Farill-ight Mounted toflush _qeil.ing . — 1_111- ; 1 11 Ridge Beam LIST OF TABLES Table No. Description Page No. Table'll WiridZonebvC cality__." Table 2 Humid and Fringe Climate Zones 12 Table 3 Roof Loads by Locality 13' Table 4 Soil Bearing Capacity by Soil Type 18 Table 5 Point -Load on Footings at Marriage Line Opdnings '22-23, Table 6 Load on Frame Pier Footings for Homes Not Re- 24-25 quiring Perimeter Blocking Except at Openings Table 7," Load on Frame Pier, Footing's for Homes. Requiring 27-30,- Table 8 Footing Materials 30 Table 9 :'Pier Configuration ------------ Table 10 Footing Dimensions 32 Table I OA Footing Thickness 33 Table 11 Pier Material Minimum Specifications 41 Table 12, Pier Construction Table 13 Floor Connection Fastening Specifications 45-53 Tablel_Maximum Strap Spacing Table 15 Strap Fastening Minimum Specifications 45-53 Table 16_ Under Floor Duct Configurations Table 17 ^ Anchor Location Types 74 -Table 18, WZ I"Fraime. Tiedown, Quantities Table 19 WZ 11 Frame Tiedown Quantities 82-85 Table 20 7 WZ III Frame Tiedown Quantities" Table 21 WZ I Longitudinal Frame Tiedown Quantities 87 Table'22 WZ 11 Li i4 lr Frame Tiedown Quantities � 88 Table 23 WZ III Longitudinal Frame Tiedown Quantities 88 ''Table 24 An6hdr Locdtibn_Lyges 89 Table 25 Anchor System Materials Specifications 90 Table 26 Electrical�Feeder Wire prio'Equiprnent Si4esj6r. Copper Conductors, 3 LIST OF FIGURES Figure No. Description Page No. Figure No. Description Page No. Figure '1 Supporting a home fo_r display 9 Figure 29" Triple Section Roof Connection Method 1 58 Figure 2 Sample Data Plate 10 Figure 30 Triple Section Roof Connection Method 2 58 Figure 2A Wind Zone Map v�Vµ 11 Figure 31' Tag Unit Flush Roof Connection____ 59 Figure 3� Thermal (Uo) Map ^12 ~ ' -^ Figure 32 Tag Unit Roofing Connection w/less than 59 two inch height difference Figure 3A Humid and Fringe Climate Map 4� 12 Figure 33 Tag Unit Offset Roof Connection ti0 Figure 3B Roof Load Map 13 Figure 34 Furnace Over Trunk Duct, Two Home -- 61 m Sections Figure 4 Crown the soil under the home 16 Figure 34A Furnace Offset from Trunk duct, Two "Home_Sectio_ns 62 Figure 5 Direct runoff away from the home _ 16 _Figure 34B Furnace Over Trunk Duct, Three Home Sections T 62 Figure 5A _ -Frost Protection Map , 19" _ Figure 34C Furnace Offset from Trunk Duct, Three Home" Section 62 Figure 6 Typical point load support locations 20 Figure 35 - Duct Crossover Located in the Roof Cavity 63� Figure 7 Typical point load support location's 21 Figure 38 In -floor Duct Connection through Rim Joist W/o Metal Sleeve 63 Figure 8 Typical support locations not requir- ing perimeter supports 23 Figure 37 In -floor Duct with Crossover Using Metal Sleeve _ 64 ry Figure."8A _ Typical marriage line support loca- . tions` not requiring perimeter sup- ; ports 24 Figure 38 Typeof Junction Box Wiring.Connec- tions 65 Figure 9 Typical support locations requiring perimeter supports 26 Figure 39 Electrical Crossover Floor Wires w/Flush Access Panels 65 Figure `10 •Typical marriage line supportloca- tions for required perimeter supports,w/Bumped-out 26 Figure 40 Floor Electrical Crossover Wires Access Panels ,65� Figure 11 Maximum footing extensions 33 Figure 41 Under the Rim Joist Electrical Crossover y 66 _ Connection with Conduit Figure 12 µ Perim_ titer°Supports 34°' Figure 42 Inside Marriage Wall Crossover Con- netion=., 66 Figure 13 Cross Beam Installation 36 Figure 43 Inside Partition or Endwail Electrical Crossover Connection 66 Figure 14 Connection using 2x10 Sill Plate Figure 44 Electrical Bonding of Multi -Section 67 Homes' Figure 15 Figure 1'S Safety Cribbing Frame•Pier Construction 39 ^ 42 Figure 45 Water Line Crossover w/Access Panel 67 Figure 45; Water Line Crossover thru Bottom Board ' 68 Figure 17 —h -.-s-.- - Correct Shim Placement - � 42 _ Figure 47 Drain Crossover Connection 69 Figures18 FloorConnection. 45-53` igure48 _ DWV$ystem 69 Figures 19 Wall Connections 45-53 Figure 49 _ DWV Connection to Sewer/Septic 70 Figures 20. Roof Connections, 45-53 Figure 50 DWV Pipe Support Options 70� Figure 21 Tag Unit Offset Floor Connection 54 Figure 51 Gas Crossover Connection 71 Figure 22 Tag; Unit Wall Connection 54: a Figure 52 TypicafAnohor Locations fo_ r a:Double Section Home in_WZ I 75 Figure 23 Tag Unit Flush Roof Connection 55 Figure 53 _ Typical Anchor Locations for a Double Section Home in WZ 11 and III 75 Figure 24 ° Tag Unit Offset Roof Connection ,.. 55°°' ., Figures• 54 Frame Tie Down,Configuration 77 Figure 25 Shingle Installation at Ridge 56 Figure 55 In -Line Anchor Configuration 90 Figure 26 " Shingle Fasteners for WZ 1 and II 56'' Figure'56,; Stabilizer Plate Configuration • 90 Figure 27 Shingle Cut In To Thirds 57 Figure 57 Anchor and Stabilizer Plate Location 91 Figure 28 ` Ridge Vent 51 Figure 58• Radius Clip 92 v Using the Manual This manual is organized into a series of steps that will take you through the entire installation process using only those pages required for the specific home -being installed. First, review the entire manual, including the Introduction chapter. As you read it, identify sections of the manual that you will need; identify other documents or information you will need; construct lists of tools and materials required for your particular installation; and make sure you have everything you need before starting work. After reviewing the entire manual, refer to the sequence of installation steps in the table below. Identify the pathway for your installation and follow the arrows downward. Select either Single Section Home or a Multi -Section Home and choose the col- umn corresponding to the home's foundation type, either Pier and Ground Anchor or Load -Bearing Perimeter Wall (see Def- initions, p. 6). Then complete the work in each of the sections starting with Getting Started. If using an alternative (proprietary) foundation system, the installation process will change from that described in this manual. Consult the system manufacturer's directions for instructions. See page 8 for alternative foundation system criteria. o Pier and Ground Anchor !; Load-BearingPerimeter Pier and Ground Anchor 'I • Load -Bearing Perimeter Wall Wall L ar Getting Started (p. 10) r� Getting. Started (p. 10) i Getting Started (p 10) _ _ _ � Getting Started (p 10) ♦ Prepare the Site (p. 15) " i . Prepare the Site (p. 15) `j Prepare the Site (p. 15) ; Prepare the Site (p. 15) n ♦ I ♦ ♦ " l; Install Footings (p. 20) Construct Foundation, `1 Install Footings (p. 20) i i Construct Foundation ♦ I '(p- 35) E ♦ (P. 35) Set the Home (p. 38), ;♦ " Set the Home (p. 38) =; ♦ Connect Utilities (p. 95)?- ♦ Complete Multi=Section Stabilizing=System Install Stabilizing Complete Multi -Section iF Set (p. 44) p 74 .i p pP d ? Set (0. 44) Prepare A liances an ♦ Equipment (p. 103). ; ' ♦ • p Com lete Roof and Exte I 'rior 56.)` .Connect Utilities•(p..95) , ♦ ,Complete Roof and Exte- Walls (p. Complete Under the rior Walls (p. 56) { Prepare Appliances and ,` .Home and, Site built Struc t 1 ♦ i Connect Crossovers Equipment (p. 103)' , tures (p. 112). ; j . Connect Crossovers, (p. 61) ' Complete Under the' "`pancy Prepare Home for Occu ;,, ♦ j Complete-lntenor (p� 72) Complete Interior (p: 72) Home and Site built Struc (p.:115) tures (p. 112) ♦ I " ♦ ., 1 Connect Utilities (p. 95) ♦' ; `Complete Installation Install Stabilizing` System Prepare Home for Occu- ' • Checklist (p. 116) j s. (p. 74) i Prepare Appliances and pancy (p•.115). ' „ �• lz. ♦ . , ° � Equipment (p. 103) ' ♦ Connect Utilities (p. 95) ♦ Complete Installation P ♦ `" 3 Complete Under the Checklist (p. 116) 'I Prepare Appliances and Home and' Site built Struc-. i� it Equipment_(p.'103) ?I tures (p. 1,12) . 1, ♦ q Complete .Under the,', ♦_ Prepare Horrie,for Occu 115) "" I? Horne and'Site built Struc- pancy (p. . tures (p. 112), complete Installation ii ♦ i = 'Prepare Home,for Occu Al w Che klist (p. 116) pancy,(p.115)I,� a 1` ♦ ,Complete Installation h 4. Checklist •(p. 116) , I REVISED MAR 13 2020 0 P Federal Manufactured P z� J Home Construction 1�4` And Safety Standards INSTALLATION LICENSE. The proof that an installer meets the requirements for installing manufactured homes under the HUD -administered installation program. LABELED. Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a certified testing laboratory, inspection agency, or other organization concerned with product evaluation. The label indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine suitable usage in a specified manner. LISTED OR CERTIFIED. Included in a list published by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, inspection agency, or other organization concerned with product evaluation that maintains periodic inspection of production of listed equip- ment or materials, and whose listing states either that the equipment or material meets nationally recognized stand- ards or has been tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner. LOAD -BEARING PERIMETER WALL FOUNDATION. A support system for the home whereby the home is mechanically fastened to a structural wall(s) that transfers gravity, lateral and uplift loads to the ground. LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (LAHJ). The state, city, county, municipality, utility, or organization that has local responsibilities that must be complied with during the installation of a.manufactured home. MUST. Indicates a mandatory requirement. N/A. Indicates not applicable. PIER. That portion of the support system between the footing and the home, exclusive of shims. Types of piers include, but are not limited to: (1) manufactured steel stands; (2) pressure -treated wood; (3) manufactured concrete stands; (4) concrete blocks; and (5) portions of foundation walls. PIER AND GROUND ANCHOR FOUNDATION. A support system for the home that employs piers under the chassis and other locations to support gravity loads and employs ground anchors and tie downs (the stabilizing system) to resist lateral and uplift loads. PERIMETER BLOCKING. Regularly spaced piers supporting the sidewalls and marriage line of the home. Some homes require perimeter blocking in addition to supports under the home's frame. QUALIFIED (OR LICENSED). Has the necessary knowledge and skills gained from experience and training that will allow performance of the job safely, competently, and in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, rules and regula- tions. Meets all necessary qualification tests including any license and certification requirements that may be in effect in the area where the home will be installed, including the requirements for installing manufactured homes under the HUD -administered installation program. The term does not incorporate a state -issued installation license or certifica- tion, except to the extent provided in this part. The term does not imply that HUD approves or recommends an install- er or warrants the work of an installer, and should not be used in any way that indicates HUD approval in violation of 18 U.S.C. 709. RAMADA. Any freestanding roof or shade structure, installed or erected over a home or any portion of the home. SHOULD. Indicates a recommendation that is strongly advised but not mandatory. SHALL. Indicates a mandatory requirement. SITE FOR A HOME. A designated parcel of land designed for the accommodation of one home, its accessory buildings or structures, and accessory equipment, for the exclusive use of the occupants of the home. SKIRTING. A weather -resistant material used to enclose the perimeter, under the living area of the home, from the bottom of the home to grade. STABILIZING SYSTEM. All components of the anchoring and support systems, such as piers, footings, ties, anchoring equipment, ground anchors, or any other materials and methods of construction that support and secure the home to the ground. SUPPORT SYSTEM. Pilings, columns, a combination of footings, piers, foundation walls, caps, and shims and any com- bination thereof that will, when properly installed, support and secure the home to the ground. TIE. Straps, cable, or securing devices used to connect the home to anchoring assemblies. UTILITY CONNECTION. The connection of the home to utilities that include, but are not limited to, electricity, water, sew- er, gas, or fuel oil. VERTICAL TIE. A tie intended to resist uplifting and overturning forces. WIND ZONE. The areas designated on the Basic Wind Zone Map, as further defined in by the Manufactured Home Con- struction and Safety Standards 7 ENGINEER'S STAMP Certain pages of this manual, display the seal of a registered engineer. Federal guidelines only require the seal from one state to be displayed, but the details herein apply to all states. SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL This icon indicates an important warning. It is critical to heed these warnings. This icon indicates a recommended best practice. While not required, following these practices will result in a superior installation, reducing the chance that cosmetic or dura- bility related complaints might arise. ABBREVIATIONS ABS Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ASTM American Society for Testing and Ma- terials AWPA American Wood Preservers Associa- tion CFM Cubic feet per minute CFR Code of Federal Regulations DWV Drain, Waste, Vent EMT Electrical metallic tubing FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency ft Foot/feet ga Gauge HUD US Department of Housing and Ur- ban Development in Inch(es) LAHJ Local Authority Having Jurisdiction Ib(s) Pound(s) max. Maximum MHCSS Manufactured Home Construction and Safety Standards min. Minimum mph Mile(s) per hour NEC National Electric Code NFIP National Flood Insurance Program NFPA National Fire Protection Association O.C. On center OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Admin- istration oz Ounce(s) P. Page psf Pounds per square foot psi Pounds per square inch SAA State Administrative Agency sq ft Square foot/feet ALTERNATIVE FOUNDATION SYSTEMS Alternative foundation systems or designs are permitted in accordance with the following: • System designs are prepared by a registered engineer or a registered architect or tested and certified by a regis- tered engineer or registered architect in accordance with acceptable engineering practice and are manufactured and installed so as not to take the home out of compliance with the Manufactured Home Construction and Safety Standards. • An Altemative Foundation and/or Tiedown system design must be submitted to the manufacturer if it is not listed on the manufacturer's website. Go to www.claytonhomes.com/builder-resources/ to view all DAPIA approved Alternative Tiedown systems. Prior to obtaining an alternative design contact the home building facility for available approved alternative designs or instructions for submitting an alternative design. F DISPLAY AND STORAGE OF THE HOME WEATHER PROTECTION If the installation is not started immediately upon delivery of the home, the retailer and/or installer has the responsibility to ensure the exterior weather protection covering of marriage walls and the roof of homes has not been damaged during shipment. Inspect the home immediately upon the delivery and frequently during storage. Promptly repair tears in the home closure materials to prevent damage from the elements. Inspect and repair nail holes in roof shingles with asphalt cement or replace damaged shingles. Inspect and repair siding as needed. SUPPORTING A HOME FOR DISPLAY When a new home is to be displayed at a retail location, temporarily block and support the home. Set up homes with sin- gle block piers (maximum height per Table 9), metal piers or jack stands spaced no further apart than 12 feet o.c. beneath each I-beam. The tire and axle system may be used as one of these required supports, and the hitch jack may be used as another. Locate the first support no further than two feet from the rear end of the home (Figure 1). Place additional sup- ports along the perimeter on either side of openings greater than four feet (i.e. sliding glass doors, bay windows, etc.). For 18' wide homes, perimeter supports must also be spaced no further than 12 feet o.c. For multi section homes, locate additional supports along the marriage line under support columns. These locations will be marked by the manufacturer. Z,Ao 12W 1 T-0° 12'-0° Figure 1. Supporting a home for display For all homes, place footings below each support. Footings may be placed directly on the surface grade without excava- tion and may be ABS pads, 2 x 10 by 16 inch long pressure treated lumber or 16" x 16" by 4 inch thick concrete pads. SUPPORTING A HOME FOR STORAGE To prevent damage to homes being stored at the manufacturer's facility, model home center or the home site, but not on display (i.e. people shall not be permitted inside the home) for a period exceeding 30 days, locate supports below each (- beam no further than two feet from each end of the home and at the approximate center of the home length. For 18' wide homes, perimeter supports must also be spaced no further than 12 feet o.c. Whether the home is being supported for display or storage the height of the home should be no higher than 48 inches as measured from the top of the ground to the bottom of the I-beam. In addition, it is extremely important that the roof/ridge vents are installed while the home is on display. Failure to install the roof/ridge vents may lead to significant damage to the roof and home. 0 Getting Started This chapter covers a few steps that, taken now, will avoid problems later in the installation process. STEP 1. LOCATE THE DATA PLATE Locate the data plate inside the home (Figure 2), typically -inside-a-kitchen cabinet door or on a wall panel or door face near the electrical panel, utility room or bedroom closet. Y^ it; *6 rcr__ t The information on the data plate will be used to verify that the home was designed for the proper location. STEP 2. CONFIRM WIND ZONE From Table 1, identify the wind zone for the home. Verify that the home conforms to the following rules and any special requirements determined by the LAHJ. • No home may be located in a higher wind zone than that indicated on the da- ta plate. (Example: a home designed for Wind Zone II cannot be placed in Wind Zone III.) • A home may be located in a lower wind zone than that indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for Wind Zone II can be placed in either Wind Zone II or I.) When a home is located in a lower wind zone than indi- cated on the -data plate it may be installed per the requirements of the lower wind zone. • Homes located within 1,500 feet of the coastline in Wind Zones II and III must be designed to withstand exposure 'D' conditions. This will be indicated on the data plate. If the home does not conform to these rules, contact the manufacturer immediately. Figure 2. Sample data plate — shown as reference only, actual data plate may vary. 10 TA921 F 4 WIAIn 7r1NF RV I C)r01 ITV Wind Zone I All areas except those areas listed below as being within Wind Zone II or III Wind. Zone"II Alabama Counties of Baldwin and Mobile Florida All counties except those listed below as within Wind Zone III' g is Counties _a_.__._�.___..__._�_>, n, Camden, Chatham, Glynn, Liberty, McIntosh Louisiana Panshes�of Acadia, Allen, Ascension, Assumption Calcasieu, Cameron, East Baton Rouge, East`Feliciana, Evangeline, Iberia,'Iberville, Jefferson Davis,, Lafayette, Livingston, Pointe Coupee, St. Helena, St. James, St. John the Baptist, St, Landry, St. Martin, St. Tammany, Tangipahoa, Vermillion, Washington, West Baton Rouge, and West Feliciana Maine Counties of Hancock and Washington Massachusetts Counties of Barnstable, IBristol_Dukes Nantucket and Plymouth Mississippi Counties of George, Hancock, Harrison, Jackson, Pearl River, and Stone North Carolina Counties of Beaufort, Brunswick, Camden, Chowan; Columbus, Craven, Curdtuck; Jones, New Hanover, Onslow; Pamlico, Pasquotank,_Pender, Perquimans, Tyrrell, and Washington, _ South Carolina Counties of Beaufort, Berkeley, Charleston, Colleton, Dorchester, Georgetown, Horry, Jasper, and Williamsburg Texas Counties of Aransas, Brazoria, Calhoun,'Cameron, Chambers; Galveston, Jefferson, Kenedy, Kleberg; Matagorda, Nueces, Orange, Refugio, San Patricio,_an_d' Willacy" Virginia Cities of Chesapeake, Norfolk, Portsmouth, Princess Anne, and Virginia Beach Wind Zone III _ Hawaii Entire state Alaska Coastal'regions.(as determined by the 90°mph`isotach on the;ANSI/ASCE 7-88 map) Floridaw Counties of Broward, Charlotte, Collier, Dade, Franklin, Gulf, Hendry, Lee, Martin, Manatee, Monroe, Palm Beach, Pinellas, and Sarasota • Louisiana „ _ _ _ s; Plaquemines St. Bernard, St Charles St Mary,. and Terrelionne 'Parishes of Jefferson, La Fourche,,Orlean emir North Carolina Counties of Carteret, Dare, and Hyde Other' ° All regions of the U.S. Territories of American Samoa, Guam, Northern Mariana Islands, Puerto Rico; Trust Territo- ry of the Pacific Islands; and'ttde'United States Virgin.`Islands Figure 2A. Mind zone map STEP 3. CONFIRM THERMAL ZONE From Table 2, identify the thermal (UO) zone for the home. Verify that the home con- forms to the following rules. • No home may be located in an area with a higher thermal zone number than that indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for Thermal Zone 2 cannot be placed in Thermal Zone 3.) 11 • A home may be located in a lower thermal zone than that indicated on the da- ta plate. (Example: a home designed for Thermal Zone 2 may be placed in ei- ther Thermal Zone 2 or 1.). • In no case may a home designated for installation in the "Humid & Fringe Climate," as identified on the data plate, be located outside of this region (Table 2). If the home does not conform to these rules, contact the manufacturer immediately. kVA kVT Nil ) ME) IAT ND MNin f SD /%... Dfl i 1Y1 Ny 1 VVY P J N c H NV UT _ 1 ``IN 1 OH rWV VA DE LN CD J 1 HI a {U �p 1 2 3 zeee, FM M 0 mw.. 0.116 0.096 0.019 l© Putd. IEw I TARI F 9 HI IMIrI Akin FRIhIRC P1 IMATC 7n AICO Figure 3. Thermal (Uo) zone map Figure 3A. Humid & fringe climate map Humid, and Fringe Climate Zone, Alabama Counties of Baldwin, Barbour, Bullock, Butler, Choctaw, Clarke, Coffee, Conecuh, Covington, Cerenshaw, Dale, Escambia, Geneva, Henry, Houston, Lowndes, Marengo, Mobile, Monroe, Montgomery, Pike, Washington, and Wilcox Florida All'counties and locations. Georgia V Counties of Appling, Atkinson, Bacon, Baker, Ben Hill, Berrien, Brantley, Brooks, Bryan, Calhoun, Camden, Char- leton, Chatham, Clay, Clinch, Coffee, Colquitt, Cook, Crisp, Decatur, Dougherty, Early, Echols, Effingham, Evans, Glynn, Grady, Irwin, Jeff Davis, Lanier, Lee, Liberty, Long, Lowndes, McIntosh, Miller, Mitchell, Pierce, Quitman, Randolph, Seminole, Tattnall, Terrell, Thomas, Tift, Turner, Ware, Wayne, and Worth .Hawaii All counties and locations Louisiana All counties and locations Mississippi Counties'of Adams, Amite;;Claibome, Clarke, Copiah,.Covingtonp Forrest, Frankiin,� George, Greene,' Hancock, Harrison, Hinds, Issagaena, Jackson, Jasper,'Jefferson, Jefferson,Davis, Jones, Lamar, Lawrence, Lincoln,.Mari=,.' LL on, Rearl.River, Perry; Pike,Rankin, Simpson, Smith;"Stone, Walthall, Warren; Wayne," and Wilkinson;` North Carolina Counties of Brunswick, Carteret, Columbus, New Hanover, Onslow, and Pender _South Carolina Counties -of Beaufort, Berkeley Charleston, Colleton,'D"orchester, Georgetown `Horry.and Jasper` Texas Counties of Anderson, Angelina, Aransas, Atascosa, Austin, Bastrop, Bee, Bexar, Brazoria, Brazos, Brooks, Bur- leson, Caldwell, Calhoun, Cameron, Camp, Cass, Chambers, Cherokee, Colorado, Comal, De Witt, Dimmit, Duval, Falls Fayette, Fort Bend Franklin Freestone Frio Galveston Goliad Gonzales Gregg,Grimes Guadalupe, 12 Hardin, Harris, Harrison, Hays, Henderson, Hidalgo, Hopkins, Houston, Jackson, Jasper, Jefferson, Jim Hogg, Jim Wells, Karnes, Kaufman, Kenedy, Kinney, Kleberg, La Salle, Lavaca, Lee, Leon, Liberty, Limestone, Live Oak, Madison, Marion, Matagorda, Maverick, McMullen, Medina, Milam, Montgomery, Morris, Nacogdoches, Navarro, Newton, Nueces, Orange, Panola, Polk, Rains, Refugio, Robertson, Rusk, Sabine, San Augustine, San Jacinto, San Patricio, Shelby, Smith, Starr, Titus, Travis, Trinity, Tyler, Upshur, Uvalde, Val Verde, Van Zandt, Victoria, Walker, Waller, Washington, Webb, Wharton, Willacy, Williamson, Wilson, Wood, Zapata, and Zavala STEP 4. CONFIRM ROOF LOAD ZONE From Table 3, identify the Roof Load Zone for the home. Verify that the home con- forms to the following rules. • No home may be placed in an area with a higher roof load than that indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for the South (20 psf) Roof Load Zone cannot be placed in the Middle (30 psf) Roof Load Zone). • A home may be located in an area with a lower roof load than that indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for the Middle (30 psf) Roof Load Zone may be placed in the South (20 psf) Roof Load Zone). When a home is located in an area with a lower roof load than indicated on the data plate it may be installed per the requirements of the lower roof load area. • There are special high roof load areas (primarily in mountains) not shown on the map. Contact the LAHJ or SAA for information about these areas. The home's data plate will indicate if the home has been designed for one of these high roof load areas. • Ramadas may be used in areas with roof live loads greater than 40 psf. Ramadas are to be self-supporting, except that any connection to the home must be for weatherproofing only. Figure 3B. Roof (snow) load map =ore.rqn Se Load jpq 40 30 20 TABLE 3_ ROOF LOADS BY LOCALITY North (40,psf roof load) Alaska All counties Names= Counties of Aroostook,; Piscataquis, Somerset, Penobscot; Waldo; -Knox, Hancock, Washington Middle (30 psf roof 'load) Colorado All counties Idaho "'' All°counties., v Iowa Counties of: Buena Vista, Butler, Calhoun, Cerro Gordo, Cherokee, Chickasaw, Clay, Dickinson, Emmet, Floyd, Franklin, Hamilton, Hancock, Hardin, Howard, Humboldt, Ida, Kossuth, Lyon, Mitchell, O'Brien, Osceola, Palo Alto, Plymouth, Pocahontas, Sac, Sioux, Webster, Winnebago, Worth, Wright Maine' r _ _Counties of Androscoggin, Cumberland, Franklin Kanabec Lincoln, Oxford, Sagadahoc, York Massachusetts County of Essex Michigan vA Counties of Alger; Alcona, Alpena; Antrim, Baraga, Benzie,'Charlevoix Cheboygan, Chippewa,, Crawford, Delta, Dickson, Emmet, Gogebic, Grand Traverse, Houghton, Iron,Kalkaska,'KeWeenaw, Leelanau, Luce, Mackinac, Marquette, Menominee; Missaukee; Montmorency, Ogemaw,„Ontonagon, Oscoda, Otsego; Presque Isle, Ros- common, Schoolcraft, Wexford Minnesota Counties of Aitkin, Anoka, Benton, Blue Earth, Brown, Cass, Carlton, Carver, Chippewa, Chisago, Cook, Cotton- wood, Crow Wing, Dakota, Dodge, Douglas, Faribault, Fillmore, Freeborn, Goodhue, Grant, Hennepin, Hubbard, Itasca Isanti Jackson Kandi ohi Kanabec Koochichin-q, Lac qui Parle Lake Le Sueur, Lincoln Lyon, McLeod 13 Montana0.v ry New Hamp- shire New York South Dakota Utah; Vermont Wisconsin Wyoming��� Meeker, Morrison, Millie Lacs, Mower, Martin, Murray, Nicollet, Nobles, Olmsted, Pipestone, Pine, Pope, Ramsey, Redwood, Renville, Rice, Rock, St. Louis, Sibley, Scott, Steele, Sherburne, Swift, Steams, Stevens, Todd, Wade- na, Wright, Washington, Wabasha, Winona, Waseca, Watonwan, Yellow Medicine All Counties All Counties Counties of Cayuga, Clinton, Essex; Erie Franklin, Fulton Genesee, Hamilton, Herkimer; Jefferson; Lewis, Living- ston,.Madison, Monroe, Montgomery, Niagara, Oneida, Onondaga Ontario, Orleans, Oswego;, St. Lawrence; Sara- toga, Schenectad Seneca, Warren, Washington, Wayne, -` y 9 y Wyoming; Yates Counties of Brookings, Clay, Codington, Deuel, Grant, Hamlin, Hanson, Hutchinson, Kingsbury, Lake, Lincoln, McCook, Miner, Minnehaha, Moody, Turner, Union, Yankton All Counties _ Counties of Addison, Caledonia, Chittenden, Essex, Franklin, Grand Isle, Lamoille, Orange, Orleans, Rutland, Washington, Windsor Counties of All Counties South: (20 psf roof load) Bayfield Barron, Buffalo, Burnett, Clark, Chippewa; boor', Douglas,, Dunn, Eau Claire, Flor ckson, "Lang lade Lincoln, Marathon, Marinette, Menominee, .Odonto„Oneida, Fepin; Pierce, ° Croix, Sawjer, Taylor; T-rempealeau,'Was; Wash'6urn Other I The states and counties not listed for the Middle or North roof load zone above are deemed to be within the South roof load zone. STEP 5. CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS Local regulations may set conditions for the siting and installation of a manufactured home. Consult the LAHJ, state manufactured housing association and the state SAA (See Resources, p. 5) for the specific local requirements, including: • Building codes that may affect the construction of site built structures and in- frastructure. • Local requirements regulating the installation of manufactured homes. • Setback requirements for property lines, streets, yards, and courts. • Fire separation distances. • Development covenants for the specific property. • The locations of flood hazard areas and any special foundation requirements for homes installed in those areas. • In some areas, building permits are required to install manufactured homes. Prior to making any alteration to the site and the home, contact the LAHJ to determine if plan approval and permits are required. V&*#ZZA Areas subject to flooding. The foundation specifica- tions contained in this manual are NOT intended to address flood loads. If the home is located in the flood plain, consult a regis- tered engineer. 14 Prepare the Site A properly prepared site is critical to a good quality installation and the long term structural stability of the home. This chapter explains the process of planning the site, evaluating the soil, and preparing the site for construction of the home's support system. STEP 1."PLAN SITE ACCESS (p. 15) ' STEP 2:°DETERMINE HOME LOCATION AND LAYOUT (p. 15) STEP 3. CLEAR =AND GRADE THE SITE-.(p,16)' STEP 4: DETERMINE SOIL CONDITIONS (p. 16) ` STEP 5': DETERMINE SOILJBEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE`(p, 17)' I STEP 6. DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPACITY (p. 19) STEP 1. PLAN SITE ACCESS Planning the route to the site is typically the responsibility of the retailer or transporta- tion company. Whoever is responsible must secure state permits from the states through which the home will pass. In planning the route, avoid obstructions that might interfere with the passage of the home, such as low hanging wires and trees, low overpasses and bridges not suitable for the load. Contact the utility company if wires need to be moved. Do not allow branches, bushes or other foliage to scrape against the home as the home is moved to the site. Avoid ditches, berms, steep slopes and soft ground. Identify and fill any holes and soft spots into which the transporter's wheels may sink. Avoid moving over steep changes in grade (20 degrees or more). If required, provide for home storage and staging areas on the site. Plan the delivery and staging of home sections and materials so that after all deliveries are complete, home sections and materials can be accessed for use and installed in the appropriate sequence. Orient home sections so they do not have to be rotated or excessively ma- neuvered during the installation process. Plan for temporary needs, such as dump- sters, portable toilets, crew parking, delivery vehicle drop-offs and concrete mixer deli- veries. Before moving the home to the site, inform the LAHJ and make sure the site is pre- pared and utilities are available. STEP 2. DETERMINE HOME LOCATION AND LAYOUT The home location may have already been determined by others. If not, plan the home location and layout in compliance with the regulations researched in Getting Started, STEP 5. CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS (p. 14). Contact utilities for locations of existing infrastructure, such as underground cables, pipes and electrical lines. When planning the site improvements, consider the following: • The home location should be level. • Avoid contact with large trees, steep slopes, poorly drained areas and poten- tial flood zones. • Preserve trees and shrubs for shade, visual screens and windbreaks. T ZZA Site Preparation. Final re- sponsibility for site prepara- tion, including soil stability and frost heave control, lies with the installer. An impro- perly prepared site may re- sult in the denial of a foun- dation -related warranty claim. T //. Fire separation. Comply with any LAHJ fire separa- tion requirements or the re- quirements NFPA 501A, 2003 edition (Chapter 6). 15 • Plan the driveway, parking areas, septic, well, other structures and utility lines. • Consider future additions, such as screen rooms, porches and awnings. • Site the home away from natural water paths. STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE Trim overhanging foliage (tree limbs, etc. that could cause damage to the home) consi- dering future growth, potential storms, swaying in wind and snow/ice-weighted branches. All organic material such as vegetation, wood, roots, twigs, dead branches, grass, brush and wood scraps must be removed in areas where footings are to be placed. Remove any debris that could become termite infested from the site and sur- rounding area. Properly dispose of all items. Crown the site (Figure 4) away from the foundation for the first ten feet with a minimum slope of 1/2 inch per foot. Where property lines, walls, slopes or other physical condi- tions prohibit this slope, provide the site with drains, swales or grading to drain water away from the structure. Any fill required to grade the site should be inorganic "con- trolled fill" applied in a maximum of four inch layers, compacted between each layer to at least 90% of its maximum relative density. Direct runoff away from the site using ditches and berms (Figure 5). If the home will have -skirting, start grading from two feet in from the edge of the home. L� HOUSE \J \ J ARROWS INDICATE DIRECTION OF WATER FLOW. Grade the ground so that water under porches, decks and recessed entries flows away from the home. If proper grading is not possible, use other methods such as a drain tile and automatic sump pump system to remove any water that may collect under the home. The home is suitable for the installation of gutters and downspouts. Gutters and down- spouts must be installed per the gutter and downspout manufacturer's installation in- structions. When gutters and downspouts are installed, direct runoff away from the home. STEP 4. DETERMINE SOIL CONDITIONS Examine the soil type under the proposed home location to make sure it is suitable for placement of a home. The design of the home's support system, including footing/pier spacing and size, will in part be determined by the bearing capacity of the soil and, if ground anchors are used, by the soil's withdrawal strength. The soil under every portion of the support system must meet the following criteria The soil must be firm and undisturbed (not previously excavated) or fill com- i // Site drainage. Moisture un- der the home can result in structural damage to the floor system, foundation, anchoring system and other parts of the home. Failure to provide adequate slope/drainage can result in moisture -related problems such as mold, mildew and erosion. Figure 4. Crown the soil un- der the home to prevent wa- ter ponding Figure 5. Direct runoff away from the home V&IOZZ Soil. Inadequate soil bearing capacity or a support sys- tem mismatched to the soil characteristics can result in excessive or differential LLS pacted to at least 90% of its maximum relative density). Uncompacted fill will settle over time, causing the home to shift and become unlevel. • Fill must not contain large debris. This too will settle over time. • The soil must not be comprised of organic clays or peat. Organic material can decay, causing settlement and also may harbor pests that can infest the home. • A soil's bearing capacity can be greatly reduced when it is saturated with wa- ter. Note that water tables may vary with seasonal or climactic conditions. Consult a geologist or the LAHJ if you are unsure of the water table level. • The soil must not be a highly expansive type. Expansive soils can expand when they become saturated with water, causing the home to shift and be- come unlevel. If soils are expansive contact a registered engineer, or regis- tered architect to assist with the design of the foundation system. STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE The soil under a home must be capable of withstanding the loads imposed by the weight of the home, its support system and furnishings as well as any loads imposed by wind, snow or other climactic conditions. SOIL BEARING CAPACITY Determine the soil bearing capacity in pounds per square foot (psf) before designing a support system. The higher the capacity (psf), the more weight the soil can hold without unduly compressing. As the soil bearing capacity increases, footings can be reduced in size or spaced farther apart. Use one or more of the following methods to determine the site's soil bearing capacity: • Test the soil. Hire a registered geologist, registered engineer, or registered architect to determine the soil classification and maximum allowable soil bear- ing capacity by testing the soil in accordance with generally accepted engineer- ing practice. In addition, the registered professional may designate a footing capacity (Ibs) based on a site -specific soils evaluation and footing design. • Obtain soil records. The local office of the U.S. Department of Agriculture's Natural Resources Conservation Service (www.soils.usda.Qov) and/or the LAHJ may have test results and/or soil analyses on file for the area. • Conduct a pocket penetrometer test. Use a pocket penetrometer to estimate allowable soil bearing capacity as follows: 1. Select a location that will be under a footing. 2. Clear a minimum area of one square foot to the depth of the bottom of the planned footing. 3. Using the instructions provided with the pocket penetrometer, take at least five readings. 4. Discard the high and low readings and average the remaining readings. Round this result down to the nearest soil bearing value shown in Table 4. 5. Confirm that the rounded result matches the soil description in Table 4. • Determine soil bearing value by visual examination. If one of the options above is not available, the values in Table 4 can be used to establish soil bear- ing capacity by visual examination. This method provides lower capacity values than the options above. Accurate soil identification typically requires special training or expertise. An engineer or building code official may be able to assist in classifying the soil found on the site. settlement of the home, which can cause the home to become unlevel, resulting in jammed doors and win- dows, cracks in finishes and ruptured plumbing connec- tions. Soil bearing capacity. Sup- port systems on soils with bearing capacities less than 1,000 psf must be designed by a registered engineer or registered architect and ap- proved by the LAHJ. Limitations of Pocket pene- trometers. Pocket pene- trometers do not work on sand or gravel. Use to de- termine allowable pressure for these types of soils. If you encounter a layer of gravel, test the soil under the gravel. Do not put the penetrometer on stones larger than its tip as this will provide an inaccurate read- ing. 17 TABLE 4. SOIL BEARING CAPACITY BY SOIL TYPE : Soil Classification` " ASTM D 249740 or . • _ ". Classification `'D-2488-00 `` ' Blow ,' : Torque Probe3 (mcorpo So11 Descrlptlon AIIoHiatile Soil Bear-' ' Count Value (inch- " Number •rated b06fererice, ing Pressgre (psf) ASTM D- pounds) „see 3285.4)„r 1 - Rock or hard pan 4,000+ GW GP, SW SP .. Sandy gravel and gravel;: y dense and/or e 40+ M ore, than 550 2' GM SM.,loaded cemented sands course gravel/cobbles; pre- 2,000 silts, clays and': coral 5,, __ ' Sand; silty sand; clayey sand; silty gravel; 24-39 351-550 3 GC, SC, ML, CL medium dense course sands; sandy gravel; 1,500 and very stiff silt, sand clays 4A CG MH?' Loosee ,to medium dense sands; firm to stiff 18 23, 276 - 350 1 000 clays and silts alluvialfills 413 CH, MHz Loose sands; firm clays; alluvial fills 1,000 12-17 175-275 re`OL OH, PT ' Uricompactad fill;'peat organic clays Refer toµ3285:202(e) 0-11' Less than1 The values provided in this table have not been adjusted for overburden pressure, embedment depth, water table height or settlement problems. z For soils classified as CH or MH, without either torque probe values or blow count test results, selected anchors must be rated for a 4B soil. 3 The torque test probe is a device for measuring the torque value of soils to assist in evaluating the holding capacity of the soil in which the ground anchor is placed. The shaft must be of suitable length for the full depth of the ground anchor. 4 The torque value is a measure of the load resistance provided by the soil when subject to the turning or twisting force of the probe. • Use default capacity. Use an allowable pressure of 1,500 psf, unless site -specific infor- mation requires the use of lower values based on soil classification and type according to Table 4. Note that soil types may vary across a home site. In this case, the soil with the lowest bear- ing capacity should be assumed when designing the support system. Keep a record of the soil bearing capacity value; it will be used later to design the home's support system. FROST LINE Obtain the local design frost depth for footings from one of the following methods: • The local authority having jurisdiction (LAHJ). • Consult with a registered architect, registered engineer, or registered geologist. • Use Figure 5A map. • Use Table 4A with the site's Air Freezing Index (AFI). TABLE AA_ nFSIr.M FRrIAT n;:PTN RnR FnnT1A1RC Air -Freezing, ,,Index m Mmioium� Depth (1n) Air-Freezmg, „ '"lrA' Minimum .' Depth (1n)';° 50 or lower 3 2000 40 250 9' 25W 45 350 12 3000 52 506 1�6 ,3500 - • 57 1000 24 4000 62 1500 32 ++ 4:5 65 =` .���°�K�lIIjN Ae%/r;, The depth of interior pier footings may be taken as one half the depth required when interior footers are located within an enclosed space meeting all the following: All vents in skirting are capable of closing at outdoor temperatures below 40 degrees F. z Skirting is insulated to a minimum R-5 when unadjusted frost depth is up to 45 inches and a minimum of R-10 when unadjusted frost depth exceeds 45 inches. 3 An approved ground vapor barrier is applied. 18 I b FROST PENETRATION MAP (AVERAGE DEPTH OF FROST PENETRATION - IN INCHES) SOURCE: U.S. DEPT. OF COMMERCE WEATHER BUREAU Figure 5A. Frost Penetration Map STEP 6. DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPACITY If the anchor holding strength of the soil is unknown test the soil per the requirements of the an- chor manufacturer's installation instructions. Concrete anchors that are listed and certified by a professional engineer to have a working load capacity of 3150 Ibs may be used as a substitute for the ground anchors specified within this manual when installed in accordance with manufac- turer's installation instructions. Torque Probe. If a torque probe is used, check with the utility companies for the location of underground ca- bles or pipes to avoid con- tact with the probe shaft. Install Footings This chapter provides instructions for the design and construction of individual footings that transfer the load from a single pier to the ground. A footing and pier together (discussed in Set the Home) is referred to as a "support". A footing may also be de- signed to carry the load of multiple piers (often called "strip" footings). This manual may be used to design unreinforced strip and slab footings. Reinforced strip and slab footings are acceptable if designed by a registered engineer or registered archi- tect. The foundation systems described in this manual have not been designed for flood resistance. STEP 1. DESIGN POINT LOAD SUPPORTS All homes will need supports, and therefore footings, under the frame, marriage line (for multi -section homes), exterior wall openings and other heavy point loads. All pier locations required at the mating line, perimeter and any special pier support locations, as required by these instructions, will be identified from the factory by a pier tag, label, paint, or other means and must be visible after the home is installed. The pier designs, support loads, and footing construction shall be as indicated in the appropriate diagrams, tables, and instructions herein. Where perimeter piers are required along the exterior wall, alternate pier spacing may be used in lieu of the factory identified locations provided the instructions of this manual are satisfied in terms of allowable spacing, pier design, and footing size. PLEASE NOTE: The manufacturer will not be responsible for damaged or removed pier tags. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that all piers are properly positioned in accord- ance with the tables & diagrams contained in these installation instructions. Create a sketch of the home that includes the exterior walls, the frame I -beams and the marriage line(s), if a multi -section home. The sketch will be used in this chapter to locate each support and note the size of the corresponding footing. Figure 6 is an example of such a completed support plan. PERIMETER DOOR PIERS BLOCKING PIERS I -BEAM FRAME 'A MEMBERS -9- OPTIONAL CORNER $ $ $" --� �- -B- � MARRIAGE PIERS WALL PIERS a- � -B- -f3- -� -e- FRAME PIERS ORC I -BEAM FRAME j PORCH POST PIERS PERIMETER I -BEAM FRAME BLOCKING MEMBERS PIERS DOOR PIERS 20 Figure 6. Typical point -load support locations As the location and load for each support is determined, note it on the sketch. When select- ing locations for supports, keep in mind that increasing the spacing between supports will increase the load on that support and the size of the required footing. DETERMINE LOCATIONS Point loads exist where a bearing/structural weight is concentrated and transferred to the foundation at a specific point. Locate a support under each point load, including the follow- ing examples: • Exterior doors in side walls at both sides of each door (blocking is not required at exterior doors in non -load bearing end walls). • Other exterior wall openings four feet and greater at both sides of each opening (including multiple windows that total four feet wide or more without intermediate supports, even if individual windows are less than four feet). • Marriage line openings four feet or greater at both sides of each opening. • Locations where through -the -rim crossover ducts penetrate the rim joist at the mar- riage line (unless otherwise noted in supplemental documents provided with the home or unless the home is constructed with a perimeter frame system). • Marriage line columns. • Load -bearing porch posts. • On each side of factory installed fireplaces when located on the exterior sidewalls or marriage walls (except when supported by the steel header). Adjustable outriggers may only be used to replace piers below exterior door or window open- ings less than 48" and below factory installed fireplaces located on the exterior sidewalls or marriage walls. Adjustable outriggers may only be used at these locations when they are in- stalled according to the manufacturer's installation instructions. Adjustable outriggers are not an acceptable replacement for perimeter supports on homes requiring perimeter blocking. Factory installed outriggers and crossmembers may also replace piers below exterior door or window openings less than 48". Additional factory installed floor joists may replace piers be- low openings larger than 48" if noted on other supplemental documents. Mark the required point load support locations on the sketch. Supports are not required where the manufacturer has reinforced the floor (such as with additional outriggers or floor joists) and so noted in the documentation provided with the home. DOOR OR OPENING LESS Figure 7. Typical point -load support locations along the marriage line. FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING SIZED AND SIZED FOR SIZED AND SIZED FOR SIZED FOR SIZED FOR SPACED PER SPAN C PER SPACED PER SPAN B PER SPAN A+B SPAN A PER TABLE 7 TABLE 5 TABLE 7 TABLE 5 PER TABLE 5 TABLE 5 CALCULATE LOADS Use Tables 5-5c to determine the loads on point load supports (columns). For each support, find the table with the appropriate section width. Then, find the row with the appropriate roof load zone and the column corresponding to the span (see Figure 7 for guidance on determining spans — if a support is shared by spans on both sides, add the respective loads together to arrive at the total load under that point). The number in the intersecting cell is the load. Note the required loads next to each point load support on the sketch. 21 TABLE S. POINT LOAD 'ON FOOTINGS AT MARRIAGE LINE OPENINGS,(LBS) Y�20 ft Max. Home Width Roofiive. Maximum Opening in Marriage Line(ft) Load (PSF) 4 8 ,12 14 : ,- 16 18 20 24 28 32 36 40. .44 48. 20 1000 1600 2200 2500 2800 3100 3400 4000 4600 5200 5800 6400 7000 7600 `30,�a °.2000 , ' 2800` 3600e 4000" 4400 .°4800 ` 5200° 6000° 6800�,' 7600'` `:.8400"' ,' 9206 -40"000f l'osido 40 2400 3400 4400 4900 5400 5900 6400 7400 8400 9400 10400 11400 12400 13400 '60• " 3200 4600 6000 6700. 7400: '8100 ,8800 „ 10200 11600, 13000 14400` 15800 .37200 18600 80 4000 5800 7600 8500 9400 10300 11200 13000 14800 16600 18400 20200 22000 23800 100 480, 0 7000, 9200' 30300 11400, 12500 13600 15800 w. 18000..,=20200 22400, ; � 24600 .26800„ 29000, ;" 120 5600 8200 10800 12100 13400 14700 16000 18600 21200 23800 26400 29000 31600 34200 a TABLE r' - : POINT LOAD ON FOOTINGS AT MARRI, �Gi LINE OPENINGS,(LBS) 24 ffDouble Section /36.ft Triple Section Max. Home"Width • . Roof Live" ', ,-., ° •� B ° Maximum Openin in Marriage Line (ft) i6 ° Load (PS_F,). "4zj 8, 12 14� ,` 18a 20 24,, 28 , •32, . .36 -" 40 ., . 44' 48' 20 1120 1840 2560 2920 3280 3640 4000 4720 5440 6160 6880 7600 8320 9040 30 °2320 3280 4240.°. T.4720 '`5200 5680- 61W_� 7120. 80k 9040 10000 10960 11926 12880 40 2800 4000 5200 5800 6400 7000 7600 8800 10000 11200 12400 13600 14800 16000 °66 '' ' 3760'' 5440 °7120 7960 ,- 8800- ' 9640 Y0480 {'12160 '13840- 15520 17200 18880 '20560. 22240 80 4720 6880 9040 10120 11200 12280 13360 15520 17680 19840 22000 24160 263203 28480 100. _ 5680'm 8320 . 10960. 12280 '13600, 14920. 1624Qr, 18880 2152.0 r 24160 26800 - 29440' -32080 34720 120 6640 9760 12880 14440 16000 17560 19120 22240 25360 1 18480 31600 34720 1 37840 40960 _TABLE 5b. POINT LOAD,ON FOOTINGS AT,MARRIAGE LINEOPENINGS (LBS) 28ft'DoubleSection /42 ft Triple Section Max. Home Width Roof Live r Maximum Opening in Marriage Line ,Load(PSF) - ° 4, `_• �. ° 8 12-�' 14, 16 18' ,20 24° . ,s2&,' . -32`� -' 36 - 40'' ;,� 44 ` .- - 48" s' 20 1240 2080 2920 3340 3760 4180 4600 5440 6280 7120 7960 8800 9640 10480 ;' ' 30• 2640 ` ' 3760 4880 ` 5440" r 6000 65,60 7120 ` 8240 ` 9360 -, 10480 11660 12720 13846` 14960 40 3200 4600 6000 6700 7400 8100 8800 10200 11600 13000 14400 15800 17200 18600 60 4320 6280 8240 9220 . 10200 11180' 12160 14120 "'16090 18040 20000 '21960 23920 ; '25880 80 5440 7960 10480 11740 13000 14260 15520 18040 20560 23080 25600 28120 30640 33160 , 100• -,' 6560 _ , 9640' ° 12720;; ' 14260` , 1'S800 _ , 17340 •18880 .21960 ,. 25040: :, 28120 31200 34280 ` 37360 40440 120 7680 11320 14960 16780 18600 20420 22240 1 25880 29520 33160 36800 40440 44080 47720 ,M r 22 TABLE 5c. POINT LOAD OKFOOTINGS;AT MARRIAGE LINE OPENINGS (LBS)e " 32 ft Double Section/48 ft Triple Section Max. Home Width Roof Live Maximum Opening in Marriage'Line (ft) Loa" (PSF) 4-" - 8 14 16,18 20 24:- ", ,2V ,, 32, �. 36 40 44 •- 48 20 1330 2260 3190 3655 4120 4585 5050 5980 6910 7840 8770 9700 10630 11560 30 2880 4120 5360 5980 6600' 7220 7840 9080 10320 11560 12800 14040 15280, 16520 40 3500 5050 6600 7375 8150 8925 9700 11250 12800 14350 15900 17450 19000 20550 66 4140 ,.6910, 9080 10165 11250" 12335 13420 15590 17760 19930 a 22100 24270 26440. 28610 80 5980 8770 11560 12955 14350 15745 17140 19930 22720 25510 28300 31090 33880 36670 100,, 7220 ;"10630• ;14040' 15745 17450 - 19155 20860 24270 27680`� ,31090 34500 37910 41320 44730, 120 8460 12490 16520 18535 20550 22565 24580 28610 32640 36670 40700 44730 48760 52790 STEP 2. DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS (Homes Without Perimeter Blocking) DETERMINE LOCATIONS All homes require regularly spaced supports along all main frame 1-beams. Select spacing between supports and sketch them on the support plan. Keep in mind that frame supports under homes with 8" deep I -beams may be no more than eight feet apart. Those under homes with 10" or 12" deep 1-beams may be no more than 10 feet apart. Generally, greater distances between supports will require larger footings. Figure 8 shows typical frame sup- port locations. PORCH POST PIERS PIERS ---B- - f3- $ B E3 E --9- -43- --B- -0- --E)- -EF- -&- DOOR PIERS I-BEAM FRAME V&IrZZA Spacing frame supports. There must be a support pier located near the end of each I-beam such that there is no more than 24 inches as measured from the outside edge of the floor to the center of the pier. Figure 8. Typical support I -BEAM locations for homes not re - FRAME quiring regularly spaced MEMBERS perimeter supports MARRIAGE WALL PIERS REQUIRED AT OPENINGS 4 FEET AND LARGER FRAME PIERS I -BEAM FRAME MEMBERS i i ,,P ,IN M,4nr%;, OF TEt '��tt11111t LE 23 DOOR OR OPENING LESS FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING SIZED FOR SIZED FOR SIZED FOR SIZED FOR SPAN C PER SPAN B PER SPAN A+B SPAN A PER TABLE 5 TABLE 5 PER TABLE 5 TABLE 5 CALCULATE LOADS Use Tables 6-6c to determine the loads on frame supports. Find the chart with the appro- priate sidewall eave overhang. Then, find the column with the appropriate roof load zone and section width. Find the row corresponding to the selected support spacing. The number in the intersecting cell is the load. Loads on all frame supports can be assumed to be equal if support spacing is equal. How- ever, if different support spacings are used then each support with a different spacing Figure 8A. Typical mar- riage line support locations for homes not requiring pe- rimeter supports IIN�/f�� . Q c should be calculated separately. —7 /I- -- AGRICUP URZI a Interpolation between values is permitted. Loads for piers installed at 5, 7, and 9 feet on- �. center can be estimated by adding the loads for the higher and lower spacing and dividing in - r half (eg. the load for piers installed at 7 feet on -center for a 16 wide with a 1-1/2" overhang •S 41itrr ���99 in a 20 psf Roof Load Zone would be: 4510 Ibs + 5666 Ibs = 10176 Ibs / 2 = 5088 lbs. d D �`�°f *� Note the location and load required of each support on the sketch. ;;O�� """••N�GS`��� (Width listed in each column of the following charts is the overall width of the home. Eg. 16 ft is a single section, 32 ft is a double section and 48 ft is a triple section). TABLE 6: LOAD,ON FRAME PIER FOOTINGS FOR HOMES NOT REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING EXCEPT AT OPENINGS (LBS) Roof'Load Zone and,Max. Home Width (1 1%2"`Max: Sidewall Eave Overhang) Pier Spacing, ' r South (20«psf) _ 10 ,ft 12 ft 14A i6'ft _ 18 it Miildle(30 psfj, 1' � ft ' ` 12 ft _ 14 ft " i6 ft 18 ft, 10,ft North'(40 psf), , 12.ft. , 14 ft "16 It , " i8 ft , Up to 4' 2195 2519 2843 3140 3410 2400 2764 3128 3462 3765 2605 3009 3413 3783 4120 > 4' to, 3093''' " 3579 4065 , 4510 . ' 4915 .3400.' ' 3946. `,4492 4993 5448 3708 "4314 4920,« 5475 5980 > 6' to 8' 3990 4638 5286 5666 6420 4400 5128 5856 6523 7130 4810 5618 6426 7167 7840 4888' w' S698, " 650& 725" ' `" 7925. ` -5400. ,�. 6310 7220., 8054 8813 ; , 5913• , 6923;. , 7933 "n 8858 ;` 9700«.., TABLE 6a LOAD ON FRAME PIER FOOTINGS FOR HOMES NOT REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING EXCEPT AT OPENINGS (LBS) Roof Load Zone an'd Max. Homg Width (6'!Max Sldewall`Eave Overhang) . " ,.Pier Spacing_ South (20 psf) .10`fL-' '12_ft �14ft, 16ft" �.18ft �' -, Middle (90,psf)_ « lO ft` 12,ft14,ftY6:ft 18ft.`,_30 <" North (40`psf) ft 1Zft 14ff", 16ft '-18ft Up to 4' 2240 2564 2888 3185 3455 2460 2824 3188 3522 3825 2680 3084 3488 3858 4195 >4'to6 3160 3646" 4132' .4578,": 4983 3490 '_4036, ":4582 5083 5538• 3820 _4426 5032' 5588 6093, > 6' to 8' 4080 4728 5376 5750 6510 4520 5248 5976 6643 7250 4960 5768 6576 7317 7990 > 8 t010 « 5000 =' y 5810!' 6620 a 7363, ._..`8038 5550 6460, ,7370, 820,4 ,-8963„ f 6100¢ J110` 8120 P[,9b4d",9888 24 TABLE 6b. LO'AD ON. FRAME PIER FOOTINGS FOR HOMES NOT REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING EXCEPT AT OPENINGS (LBS) Roof Load Zone and Max. Rome Widtt _(12" Max. Sidewall-Eave Overhang) Pier Spacing 30/20, ft " , `South (20 psf) 12/24 ft 14/28/42 ft' ,;16/32/48 ft, 10/20- ft Middle (30 psf) Middl - 12/24 ft 14/28/42 ft_ � 16/32/48ft ti 10/20 ft "� North (40 psf) 12/24 ft 14/28/42.ft 16/32/48 ft Up to 4' 2300 2624 2948 3191 2540 2904 3268 3541 2780 3184 3588 3891 > 4' to 6' 3250� 8736 4222 4587 3610' '4156 - 4702 5112 ' -3970- 4576 5182 5637 > 6'to 8' 4200 4848 5496 5757 4680 5408 6136 6682 5160 5968 6776 7382 > 8' to 10- 5150 5960 . ' 6770 - 7378 5750 6660 7570 8253 6350 7360 8370 9128 TABLE 6c. LOAD ON FRAME.PIER FOOTINGS FOR HOMES NOT.REQgIRING PERIMETER• BLOCKING EXCEPT.AT OPENINGS(LBS) Roof Load Zone and Max. Home Width (24" Max. Sidewall Eaive Overhang) Pier Spacing 20 ft, South (20 24 ft psf) 28%42 ft ; 32/48_ft 20 ft, �;, Middle (30 psf) ° 24 ft28/42 ft `,` 32/48 ft 20 ft" North (40 -' 24 ft. " psf) 28/42 ft32/48 ft Up to 4' 2420 2744 3068 3311 2700 3064 3428 3701 2980 3384 3788 4091 >4'to6 '3430. 3916 4402 4767 3850 _ 4 -a 4942 55 32 2 4 ' 'S93T96 > 6' to 8' 4440 5088 5736 6222 5000 5728 6456 7002 5560 6368 7176 7782 >* 0301 5450 6260 7070 7678' 6150 70-60 7970 8653 ;• 6850, 786U 8870 9628 Calculate Loads Use Table 6d to determine the loads on supports below openings in the sidewall when perimeter blocking is not required. Find the row with the appropriate opening span. Then, find the column . i+h +ho nnnrnnrin+c flnnr wiri+h Tha nl Imhpr in thA infprRACtlnn Cell Is the load. TABLE6d. LOAD ON'PIER FOOTINGS AT OPENINGS ALONG THE SIDEWACL (LBS) ' Roof Load Zone and Mix. Home Width (24', Max. SidewAl Eave Overhang) . Pier Spa Icing South (20 psf) South (20 psf) 10/20, ft 12/24 ft ' 14/28/42 ft 16/32/48 ft 18' ft . _ Pier Spacing 10/20 ft 12/24 ft ' 14/29/42 A 16/32/48 ft 18' ft_ . Up to 3' 1025 1100 1175 1244 1306 >S' to 6' 1400 1520 1640 1750 1850 >3''to 4' . 1150 1240• 1330 ,•` "1411' 1488 . ->6'.to 8' 1650 1800 1950, 2088 2213 > 4'to 5' 1275 1380 1485 1581 1669 >8'to 10' 1900 2080 2260 2425 2575 Pier Spacing Middle (30ps1`) , . 10/20 ft .12/24 ft 14/78/42 ft 16/32/48 ft . 18': ft Pier Spacing Middle (30,psf) 10/20 ft 12/24 ft ' 14/28/42 ft 16/32/49 ft � 18 ft Up to 3' 1200 1300 1400 1492 1575 >S'to 6' 1680 1840 2000 2147 2280 > 3' to 4' . 1360 - ' .1480' s - . 1600 ._ ;1710� 1810 , °'>6' to 8' , 2000 • • 2200. 2400 . 2583 2750- > 4' to S' 1520 1660 1800 1928 2045 >8' to 10' 2320 2560 2800 3020 3220 Pier;Spacing - North (40 psf) ;10/2'0-ft 12/24 ft- 14/28/42,ft' 16/32/48 ft - 18 ft Pier Spacing, North (40 psf)' 10/20,ft 12/24 ft, 14/28/42 ff. 16/32/48 ft - .,18ft Up to 3' 1375 1500 1625 1740 1844 >5'to 6' 1960 2160 2360 2543 2730 > 3' to 4' 1570 1720 : � ' . ` 1870 2009 ° ' , 2533 ' >6' to 8' 2350 - 2600 ` ' 2850 3079; > 4' to S' 1765 1940 2115 2275 2421 >8' to 10' 2740 3040 3340 3615 3865 STEP 3. DESIGN FRAME AND PERIMETER With Perimeter Blocking) DETERMINE LOCATIONS Depending on design and location, some homes require re lE ports along all of the sidewalls and marriage walls in additig) t( perimeter support locations will be identified by labels attached sidewalls and marriagewalls and noted on the Data Plate. )!�?i( A:�ill�r\l AAA° E, BqU.at.—:- d, % �l 8 Spacing frame supports. There must be a support each of the label locations. Additionally, perimeter support locations may be identified by a white stripe or mark beneath the home on the bottom board material. Perimeter blocking supports must be placed no further than 8 feet on -center. If required, perimeter supports are only needed on bearing walls. For 20 psf roof live load, perimeter support is only required at exterior doors and other openings 48" and larger, un- less noted otherwise. Supports may be added at each corner of each endwall for leveling purposes, but are not required. Bearing walls are those walls that support the ends of roof trusses or rafters (typically sidewalls and marriage walls but not end walls of main units or sidewalls of tag units). To minimize the number of required perimeter supports, space them evenly between point load supports as shown in Figure 9 and Figure 10 (but not under open spans). These fig- ures identify typical support locations for homes requiring perimeter supports. PERIMETER DOOR PIERS BLOCKING PIERS OPTIONAL -e- --e- --e- - - -e-- CORNER $ $ --B- -B- PIERS ORC I -BEAM FRAME -� - e 8-- -e-- -e- l PORCH POST PIERS DOOR PIERS DOOR OR OPENING LESS THAN 48 IN. IN WIDTH RIDGEBEAM BLOCKING PIERS I -BEAM FRAME MEMBERS MARRIAGE WALL PIERS FRAME PIERS I -BEAM FRAME MEMBERS COLUMN POST OR WALL I LESS THAN 16 IN. IN WIDTH SPAN A FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING SIZED AND SIZED FOR SIZED AND SIZED FOR SIZED FOR SIZED FOR SPACED PER SPAN C PER SPACED PER SPAN B PER SPAN A+B SPAN A PER TABLE 7 TABLE 5 TABLE 7 TABLE 5 PER TABLE 5 TABLE 5 CALCULATE LOADS Use Tables 7-7c to determine the loads on frame and perimeter supports for homes requir- ing perimeter blocking. Find the chart with the appropriate sidewall eave overhang. Then, find the column with the appropriate roof load and section width. Find the group of rows cor responding to the selected support spacing. The values in the intersecting cells are the loads for the frame, perimeter and marriage line supports respectively. Loads on supports of a given type (frame, perimeter or marriage) can be assumed to be equal if support spacing is equal. However, if different support spacings are used then each support with a different spacing should be calculated separately. Loads for piers installed at 5, 7 and 9 feet on -center can be estimated by adding the loads pier located near the end of each I-beam such that there is no more than 24 inches as measured from the outside edge of the floor to the center of the pier. Figure 9. Typical support Ic cations for homes requiring perimeter supports Figure 10. Typical marriage line support locations for homes requiring perimeter supports V&*Irzzj A perimeter support must be installed within 4 feet of col- umn supports and the corner of the home when the home i designated for perimeter blocking. The loads listed in Tables 5 for homes greater than 20 psf roof load include 26 for the higher and lower spacing and dividing in half (eg. the load for frame piers the additional 4 foot span. installed at 7 feet on -center for a 16 wide with a 1-1/2" overhang in a 20 psf Roof Load Zone would be: 2823 Ibs + 3630 Ibs = 6453 Ibs / 2 = 3227 Ibs). Note the location and load required of each support on the sketch. (Width listed in each column of the following charts is the overall width of the home. Eg. 16 ft is a single section, 32 ft is a double section and 48 ft is a triple section). ` TABLE:7'. LOAD ON FRAMEAND PERIMETER PIER FOOTINGS FOR HOMES REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING (LBS) ' Roof Load Zone and Max. Home Width (1-1/2" Max. Sidewall Eave Overhang) Pier South (20 psf) Middle (30 psf) North (40 psf) North (60 psf) Spacing Location 30 ft 12 ft14 ft , 16 ft 18 ft 10' ft 12#t : 14 it '° 16 ft 18 fi 10 ft 12 ft 14 ft 16 ft 18 ft 10 ft 12 ft 14 ft 1 16 ft 18 ft Up to 4' Frame 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 Up to 4' . Sidewall 1175 . 1295 1415 1525 1625 1380 1540 1700 1847 1980. 1585 1785 1985 2168 2335 1995 2275 2555 2812 3045 > 4' to 6' Frame 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 > 4' to 6' Sidewall ' 1563 1743 ' 1923 2088 2238 1870 2110 235D' 2570 2770 2178 '2478. 2778 3053 13363 2793 3213 '3633 4018 , 4368 > 6' to 8' Frame 24401 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 32561 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 24401 2848 3 561 3630 3970 > 6' to 8' x Sidewall. - 1950' 2150 2430 2650' `2850 2360 2680 3000' ' 3293 3560 2770' 3170 3570 3937 4270 3590 4150 4710 5223 ,5690 > 8' to 30' Frame 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 Pier North (go psf) North (100'psf) North (120psf) Spacing - Location - 10 ft: 12 ft 14 ft l6 ft ' 18 ft 16 ft 12 ft 14,ft: 16 ft lift 10 ft 112 ft 14 ft =16 ft„ 18 ft ° Up to 4' Frame 1420 1624 1828 2015r3078 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 Up to 4' Sidewall 2405 112765 3125 3455 2815 3255, 3695, 4098 4465 3225 3745 4265 4742 5175 > 4' to 6' Frame 1930 2236 2542 2823 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 > 4'to 6'" Sidewall 3408 3948 4488 4983 4023 4683 5343 5948 6498 4638 5418 6198',6913 7563 > 6' to 8' Frame 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 > 6' to 8' Sidewall ° 4410 5130 ; 5850 6510' 7110 5230 6110 6911, 7797 8530 6050 7090 8130 .9083 :9950 > B' to 30' Frame 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 1 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 1 4438 4863 `lltitilrlllf/jj. IN .• AGRICU i :YIli1'f,�GW'+' `�• •'�� � � 0 i � �•���, ��'`.� it fillll 27 28 TABLE 7b. LOAD ON FRAME AND PERIMETER PIER FOOTINGS "FOR HOMES REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING �(LBSj Roof Load Zone and Max. Home Width (12" Max. Sidewall Eave Overhang), Pier" Spanng Location-', -° South (20 psf) 20 ft, 24/36.ft �28/42 ft 32/48 ft '20 ft' Middle (30 psf) 24/36 ft"28/42 ft 32/48 ft " ,20 ft ' No rth `24/36 ft (40,pef) 28/42 ft '32/4l ft No rth (60 psf) 20 ft 24/36 ft '28/42 ft 32/48 ft Up to 4' Frame 1420 1624 1 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 Up to 4' Sidewall 1280 1400 1 1520 1610 1520 1680 1840 1960 1760 1960 2160 2310 2240 2520 2800 3010 Up to 4' Marriagewall 1760 2000 1 2240 2420 2160 2480 2800 3040 2560 2960 3360 3660 3360 3920 4480 4900 > 4' to 61 Frame 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 > 4' to 6' Sidewall 1720 1900 2080 2215 2080 2320 2560 2740 2440 2740 3040 3265 3160 3580 4000 4315 > 4' to 6' Marriagewall 2440 2800 3160 3430 3040 3520 4000 4360 3640 4240 4840 5290 4840 5680 6520 7150 > 6'to 8' Frame 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 1 3256 3562 1 24401 2848 3256 1 3562 > 6'to 8' Sidewall 2160 2400 2640 2820 2640 2960 3280 3520 3120 3520 3920 4220 4080 4640 5200 5620 > 6'to 8' Marriagewall 3120 3600 4080 4440 3920 4560 5200 5680 4720 5520 6320 6920 6320 7440 8560 9400 > 8'to 10' Frame 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353 Pier. . Spacing " "Location' - 20 ft'' _ North ,24 ft', (80 psf), ; 28/42 ft 32/48 ft �20 ft North � 24 ft (100:psf),. 28/42.ft 32/48:ft 20, ft:- ., North (120psf) % 24 ft; 28/42ft 32/48 ft n Up to 4' Frame 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 Up to 4' Sidewall 2720 3080 3440 3710 3200 3640 4080 4410 3680 4200 4720 5110 Up to 4' Marriagewall 4160 4880 5600 6140 4960 5840 6720 7380 5760 6800 7840 8620 > 4' to 6' Frame 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 > 4' to 6' Sidewall 3880 4420 4960 5365 4600 5260 5920 6415 5320 6100 6880 7465 > 4' to 6' Marriagewall 6040 7120 8200 9010 7240 8560 9880 10870 8440 10000 11560 12730 > 6'to 8' Frame 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 > 6'to 8' Sidewall 5040 5760 6480 7020 6000 6880 7760 8420 6960 8000 9040 9820 > 6' to 8' Marriagewall 7920 9360 10800 11880 9520 11280 13040 14360 11120 13200 15280 16840 > 8' to 10' Frame 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 1 3970 4353 ti(Iliirir/ 0. p ••••• ��(` Fi M AGRICU, UR Fn � % ••0 a v� �� (i 4• d1 / .• �/J f � •�• O U .i u Cyr ��`,`,�,\� l/litlilltll\ 0 TABLE 7c. LOAD ON FRAME' AND,PERIMTER PIER -FOOTINGS FOR HOMES REQUIRING PERIMETER, BLOCKING'(LBS) ,Roof load Zone and Max. Home Width (24" Mik. Sidewall Eave Overhang) Pier Soutfi (20 psf) Middle (30 psf) North (40 psf) ..< North (60 psf) Spacing 'Location 20 fE 24/36,ft 28/42 ft 32/48 ft 20, ft 24/36 ft 28/42 ft 32/48'ft "20 ft '24/36'fr 28/42 ff 32/48 ft '20 ft 24/36 ft 28/42 ft 32/48 f Up to 4' Frame 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 Up to o' Marrdegewall 1760 2000 �640 1730 . ,1680. 1840, T , 2000 _ 2120� 1960� :2160.,° , ,2366 � 2510. `� 2520 �a 2800 � 3080=; � , 3290� Sidewall .: 1400 1520 , 1 is 240 2420 2160 2480 2800 3040 2560 2960 3360 3660 3360 3920 4480 4900 4 to 6" Frame 1930 2236 2542 2772 - 1930 2236, 2542 2772. 1936 2236 —2542 2542 °Y 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772? > 4'to 6' Sidewall 1900 2080 2260 2395 2320 2560 2800 2980 2740 3040 3340 3565 3580 4000 4420 4735 4' to 6' Marriagewall 2440 2800 3160 3430 3040 3526. 4000 4360` 3640 4240 48 40 5290' 4840' '5680 .6526- 7150_ > 6 to 8' Frame 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 >6'to8' Marrdia ewall 31� 00 '�,2640 2880 - 3060 2960 3280 3600�. 3840 � 3520� 3920. 4320 4620; 4640 5200 ' 5760 "61i30' g 20 3600 4080 4440 3920 4560 5200 5680 4720 5520 6320 6920 6320 7440 8560 9400 > 8' to 10 Frame �� 2950 3460 ` ' 3970 4353 ° 29. 50 3460 3970 " 4353 2950 3460 ' �3970 '4 2950' 343970 4353 Pier North, 80 s ( . P_ f) North (300 ps Nnrr6 f»n apacmg Up to 4' Up to 4' Up to 4' Location,., _ _, Frame Sidewall Marriagewall 20, ft; 1420 `3080 4160 ., 24 fF. 1624 ; _3440 _ 4880 28/42 ft 1828 '3800 5600 ,421A0 ff � 20 ft 1981 1420 4070 3640 6140 4960 , 24'ft ' 1624 4080'e` 5840 28/42.ft 1828 ' 45M, 6720 ,32/48 ft 1981 . 4850 `' 20 ft-' 1420 4200 _ gyp 24 ft 1624 - 4720,Y 28/42 ft 1828 •' 5240 ` _32/48 ft 1981 .5630', 7380 5760 6800 7840 8620 > 4' to 6' Frame 1930 ` 2236 2542 ., 2772. 1930 2336 . 2542 % . 2772s .1980 ;2236 2772, ' > 4' to 6' Sidewall 4420 }6040 4960 5500 5905 5260 5920 6580 7075 6100 6880 7660 8245 > 4' to 6' Marriagewall' 7120' '8200 9010' 7240 85601, 9880- . ?10870 8440' 10000 r 11560 > 6'to 8 Frame �" 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 12730 3562 6' to 8 `Sidewall 5760' 6480 " 7200 77740 ' 6880 7766 " 8646 `9300 ` 8000 9040 ' 10080 > 6'to 8' Marriagewall 7920 9360 10800 11880 9520 11280 13040 14360 11120 13200 15280 ,10860 16840 ' >81to10' Frame a 2950 >3460'�3970,4353�- 2950 3460':` 3970,` ,^4353'2950 3460 ,`3970."4353 STEP 4. SELECT FOOTING MATERIAL Select one of the products and materials from Table 8 for the footings. TABLE 8. FOOTING MA .�aj%,,,IIK Ai OF T /��rlllli Ik Material � , , . _ • , . �;�Approprlate Use �t`Speclficatlon _ Minimum 6" thick poured -in -place concrete pads, slabs or ribbons with at least aX Poured concrete All soil types 28 day compressive strength of 3,000 psi. Cast -in -place concrete footings may also require reinforcing steel based on acceptable engineering practice, the design _ _ y loads, and site specific soil conditions. Minimum 4° thick nominal.'precast',concrete pads meeting or ezceeding;ASTM C. y. Pre -cast concrete All soil types 00-02a,- tandard Specification for Load Bearing'Conctete Masori 'Omits without rein fo cement,_with at�least a 28 day,compressive strength of 1;200 psi E ABS plastic Per Pad Manufacturer's Use in accordance Wth the pad manufacturer's instructions. Must be certified for ` Instructions use in the soil classification at the site, listed or labeled for the required load capac- ity. May be placed directly on soil or concrete. Proprietary systems. Consult system manufac- turer Consult system manufacturer 30 STEP 5. SIZE FOOTINGS Once the load on the footing and the soil bearing capacity are known, calculate the size of each footing as follows: 1. From Table 9 determine if the pier is to be of single stack blocks (8 inch x16 inch) or double stack blocks (16 inch x 16 inch). 2. Locate the group of columns in Table 10 with the soil bearing capacity deter- mined in Prepare the Site, STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE (p. 17). Use the next lowest value if the exact value does not appear. 3. Find the row corresponding to the pier capacity required by Tables 5, 6 or 7. Then, read across the table to determine the minimum required footing area for the corresponding pier capacity and soil bearing capacity. 4. The required footing size and pier capacity may be changed by selecting differ- ent support spacing. TABLE 9. PIER CONFIGURATION Maximum load_ (Ibs) Pier Con- figuration Hei hf- g Confi uratiom -g ;'Without With° Mortar Mortar SingleSingle stack blocks with long side tack Less than 36 in * perpendicular to frame I-beam or 6,500 7,680 parallel to perimeter rail (rim joist) Double 67' Mazes Double interlockedblocks 13,000, 15,360 Stack. u 19,500 23,034 Triple Stack 67" Max. Triple, interlocked blocks _ Double Reinforced 108 Max.`* Double interlocked blocks NA 39,500 * Single stack piers may be constructed up to 54" max. height only when installed as pe- rimeter and marriage line support piers. ** Cross reference maximum allowable pier height with maximum floor height listed in frame tiedown charts. If maximum height listed in frame tiedown charts is exceeded then designs must be provided by a registered professional engineer or registered architect. 31 TABLE 10. FOOTING DIMENSIONS Note: Pier - Soil Bearing Capacity (PSF) Round To calculate a square or rectan- Capacity Required Footing Area (square inches) Footer gular footer: Ibs 1000 1500 2000 2500 1 3000 4000 Diameter 1000 .144, 128 128 128 '128 128 Length (in) x Width (in) = Area 1200 173 128 ;` 128` 128 128° �, 128 1400 202 134 128 128 128 128 Example: 1500 230 154 128 - 128 128. 128• 1800 259 173 130 °s 128 128 128 ` 2000 288 192 " 144 128 12& 128 16 in x 20 in = 320 sq. inches 2200 317 211=_` 158 128 128 -128 2400 346 230 ` 173 138, ' 128 128 To calculate a round footer: 2600 374 250• 187 150 128 128 2800 403 269 202:' 161` "134 128 ` 3.14 x .25 x Diameter (in) x Di- 3000 432 288173 144 128 ameter (in) = Area 3100 446 29S 223 179 149 128 3200 461 307 230 184 154 128 Example: For a 22" diameter 3300 475, 317 238 '` ,; 190 158 128 footing 3400 490 ,,- 326 245 196 163 128 3500 504- 336 252: 202 168 Us 3.14 x .25 x 22 in x 22 in = 380 3600 518 , . 346 259 207 173 130 sq. Inches 3700 533, 355 266 213 178 133 1 3800 547", ` '' 365 274 219, , 182 137 , 8 3900 562" - 374 281 225 187 140 4000 576 384 288 230 192 144 ` i 4100 590 394 295 236 197 146 • n 4200 605 403 302 1 242 - 202 151° % c° 4300 619', 413 310 248 206 155 1 1h 4400 634 422 317 553 211 158 4500 648 432 324 259 216 162 ' 4600 662442 331 265 221 166 .. 4700 677' 451 338 271 226'-169 4800 691`: 461 346 276 230 173 4900 706,' 470 353 282 235 176 5000 720 480,,, 360 288 240 180 5200 749 499, 374 300 250 187 5400 778 518'-" 389 311 259 194 5600 806 `538 403 323 269 202 5800 835 557 418 334 278 209 6000 864 576, 432 346 288 216 6200 893 595 1 446 357 298 223' 6400 922 614, " 461 369 307 230, 6600 E950 634 475 380 317 238 6800 9 653,' 490,, 392 326 245 7000 1008 672 504 403 336 252 7200 1037 7 691 - 518 415 346 259 \\\l�lilll�N 7400 1066 710 533 426 355 266 7600 1094 730 547 438 365 274 ��~\ �.••• �; F ��••° f�(` f/,j 7800 1123 749 562 . 449 374 281 2 8000 1152 768 576 461 384 288 4 �• w� 8500 1224 816 612 490 408 306 UR 9000 1296 864 648 518 432 324 :_ ; ACRICU 9500 1368 912 684, 547 '456 "' 342 -- 10000 1440 960 720 576 480 360 10500 1512 1008 756 605 504 378 c i :2►tlrr RG+' 11000 1584 1056 792 634 528 396 h ��is •`°:�dq� �� 11500 1656 1104 828 662 552 i 414 /r •• 0•°• ��� 12000 1728 1152 864 691, 576 432 12500 1800 1200 900 720 600 °• 450 ��//f/illilyll� 13000 is 72 1248 936 749 624 468 �14000 1944 1296 972 778 648 486 2016 1344 1008 806 672 't504 3 02088 1392 1044 835 696 • 522' 15000 2160 1440 1080 864 720 540 15500 2232 1488 1116 893 744 558 16000 1 2304 1 1536 1 1152 922 768 ;576 J 32 Design individual or unreinforced strip footings to comply with the following additional requirements (does not apply to unreinforced slab design): • To keep footings directly under I -beams and other support points, size them slightly larger than the minimum required area to allow slight adjustment of the pier location during home installation. • Design footings with a footing extension (projection beyond the base of the pier) no greater than the footing thickness (Figure 11). Increase footing thick- ness if necessary. 4• 6• 16' BLOCK 41TYp= 24' FOOTING EXTENDS EXTENDS BY / 16- 16• NO YES BY ITS THICKNESS NO MORE THAN ITS / 24' 16• 1 OR LESS THICKNESS / YES \W 16• BLOCK 4• 6' 4. 4' 4• 4. �32 SPLIT FOOTING SPLIT FOOTING T� / ' YES EXTENDS LESS NO EXTENDS MORE PRECAST OR POURED FOOTER J THAN ONE THIRD THAN ONE THIRD WHICH EXTENDS PAST ALLOWABLE / ITS WIDTH ITS WIDTH PROJECTION MAY NOT BE INCLUDED IN FOOTER AREA The footing sizes shown are for square pads and are based on the surface ar- ea (square inches). Design non -square footings such that the area and thick- ness is equal to or greater than the area of the square footing shown in Table 10 and the distance from the edge of the pier to the edge of the footing is not more than the thickness of the footing. Footers may be either 4-inch precast or poured or a combination of both with a combined thickness complying with the requirements of Table 10A. TABLE 10A. FOOTER THICKNESS Poured'in Place` Footing f6r " Poured m Place.Footing for Single Stack Pier Doutile StackPier" Min. Footer Max Footer Max. Area Min. Footer Max Footer Max.,Area Thickness,' _`Dimension :. (sq' In)' Thickness " Dimension (sq. in)' (in) (in x in) (in) (in x in) 6 28 x 20 560 6 28 x 28 784 —_ 36 x 28 8 1008 — 8 - �10 m _32 `x 32 1024 �10 — 36 x 36— 1296 Vrr 12 ' 1 ""' 40.x332 " 1280 ' _ 12 40 it 40' 1600-: — _ — _. . u .._ 14 44 x 44 1936 • ° 76 . :. 48.x 4'8� 2304,, STEP 6. INSTALL FOOTINGS Construct the footings as follows: Maintain the distance between adjacent piers to within 10% of the tabulated spacing and so the average distance between piers is equal to or less than the tabulated spacing. Whenever possible, place pier supports directly under the required locations. If plumbing, electrical or mechanical equipment interferes, place supports no more than 6 inches in either direction of the support point. Recess perimeter pier supports no more than 10 inches from the edge of the floor with added support as shown in Figure 12. Figure 11. Maximum footing extensions V&F+IFZZA Placing Concrete anchors. If anchors will be placed in concrete follow instructions in Install Stabilizing Sys- tem (p. 74) to determine anchor layout. Either place anchors immediately after the concrete has been poured or drill them in after the concrete has set. 33 !lr" i r EXTERIOR F� FLOOR RIM JOIST TYPICAL FLOOR JOIST —WOOD WEDGES PRESSURE TREATED OR 'y HARDWOOD 4x4 OR TWO BLOCK 2x4's NAILED TOGETHER ON EDGE. MUST SPAN A MINIMUM OF TWO FLOOR / JOISTS. 10" MAXIMUM SETBACK FROM EDGE OF FLOOR BLOCKS PARALLEL WITH EDGE OF FLOOR BLOCKS PARALLEL AND RECESSED BACK FROM EDGE OF FLOOR If footings are rectangular, orient them so that the long side is perpendicular to the home's I-beam. Place the bottom of footings on undisturbed soil or fill compacted to at least 90% of its maximum relative density. In freezing climates protect footings from the effects of frost heave in accord- ance with -any LAW requirements (see -Prepare -the Site, p. 15). Place the bot- tom of the footings below the frost line. Insulated foundations or other frost pro- tection options are acceptable when designed by a registered engineer or reg- istered architect. Monolithic slabs are allowed above frost depth when de- signed by a registered engineer or registered architect to resist the effects of frost heave. Anchorage requirements must be included with each registered engineer or registered architect design when the anchorage requirements listed in this manual cannot be accommodated. Prior to obtaining an alternative design contact the home building facility for available approved alternative de- signs or instructions for submitting an alternative design. Make sure the top surface of the footing is level, flat and smooth. Figure 12. Perimeter sup- ports Excavation. If excavation is required, mark the footing locations on the ground with stakes before beginning to dig. 34 Construct Foundation (FOR HOMES WITH LOAD BEARING PERIMETER WALL) This chapter provides guidelines and recommendations for the design and construction of a basement or crawlspace foundation using a load bearing perimeter wall. A load bearing perimeter wall foundation system uses a wall along the outer edge of the home to support the home's outside walls. This perimeter support works with interior supports such as piers, columns and cross beams that support the home's frame and, if multi -section, marriage line. STEP 1. OBTAIN A FOUNDATION DESIGN If a load bearing perimeter wall foundation design has not been provided by the home / // manufacturer, it is the responsibility of the retailer and/or home owner to provide a de- sign approved by an engineer or architect, licensed in the state where the home will be Using engineered designs. installed. The approved design must comply with the LAHJ regulations for foundation This section is NOT intend - design, waterproofing and drainage, and the following: ed to provide a complete • The foundation perimeter bearing wall must be supported with a concrete slab design for a buildable foun- or continuous strip footing around the perimeter of the home. Interior piers dation. A complete design must be supported by a slab or footings. If footings are used under interior must be obtained that is piers, they may be designed as in Design Frame and Perimeter Supports, suitable for the local area p. 25. and sealed by a professional • Slabs must extend to the edges of the home. IMPORTANT: Verify the di- engineer or registered archi- mensions of the actual floor width (eg. a 28' wide home does not meas- tect, licensed in the state. ure 28 feet in width). Alternate foundation designs • Footings and slabs must be protected from the effects of frost heave by ex- must be approved by the manufactururer and DAPIA. tending the footings to or below the frost line or by using a frost protected Prior to obtaining an alterna- shallow foundation design. tive design contact the home building facility for available STEP 2. EXCAVATE approved alternative de - Excavate for the foundation, properly disposing of the earth that is not needed for signs or instructions for backfill or site grading purposes. submitting an alternative de- sign.The manufacturer is STEP 3. CONSTRUCT THE FOOTINGS OR SLAB capable of providing limited Construct the foundation according to the approved design, including the perimeter model specific foundation designs upon request. foundation wall, drainage system, footing(s) and/or slab. STEP 4. CONSTRUCT THE PERIMETER WALL Foundation ready home. Unless the approved design requires otherwise, construct the perimeter wall with mor- Make sure that homes to be installed on a basement or a tared and reinforced concrete blocks or reinforced poured -in -place concrete. Install re- crawlspace have been or - inforcement according to the approved design or LAHJ. Install ventilation and access dered with a recessed frame openings according to the approved design, or if not specified, according to the re- or as a basement -ready quirements in Complete Under the Home, STEP 3 INSTALL SKIRTING (p. 113). frame system, where the 35 Where open slatted deck boards are used at recessed entries and porches, provisions must be made to ensure water is not permitted to drain into the area under the condi- tioned portion of the home. Any perimeter type skirting or foundation wall should be in- stalled to follow the exterior of the wall of the home and permit the area beneath the porch to drain water away from the home. When constructing pockets for a cross beam system, measure the beam depth and lo- cate the pockets carefully. It is critical that the home's frame rests on top of the cross beam and the perimeter of the floor rests squarely on the foundation wall sill plate (Figure 13). Leave room for a two-inch nominal, hardwood spacer or steel plate spac- er on top of the wall pockets (to prevent corrosion, the steel beams must not be in di- rect contact with concrete). Leave at least one inch for thermal expansion at the ends of the beams and maintain a minimum of two inches of bearing area for the beams in the pockets (yielding a minimum pocket depth of three inches). Bolt a pressure treated wood sill plate (minimum 2 x 6) to the top of the foundation wall. If the home's siding cannot be nailed through, use a 2 x 10 sill plate that extends into the foundation 1-1/4 inches (Figure 14). The home can then be connected to the foundation by fastening the sill plate into the floor joists from below. Connect the home to the foundation according to the approved design (See Step 1). frame is designed to avoid interference with the founda- tion wall. Checking the water table. For basements, check for a high water table. The water table may vary seasonally or based on weather condi- tions. A geologist can per- form an algae test to de- termine the water table lev- el. The foundation design must account for a high wa- ter table. Level the wall. Make sure the foundation is level and straight with no more than a 114 inch vertical variation over the entire foundation and no more than 1/8 inch vertical variation over any two -foot length. Check for Plates. When us- ing a cross beam system, check and compensate for reinforcement plates that add thickness to the chas- sis beam at axle locations. Figure 13. Cross beam in- stallation Figure 14. Connection using 2 x 10 sill plate 36 STEP 5. INSTALL INTERIOR SUPPORTS Install piers, columns and cross beams to support the interior of the home according to the approved design. STEP 6. DAMP PROOF FOUNDATION WALL Damp or water proof foundation walls as necessary according to local jurisdiction re- quirements. STEP 7. BACKFILL AND GRADE Backfill against the foundation wall to the height of the damp proofing.Take care to not damage the drainage system. Grade the fill as per Prepare the Site (p. 15). 37 Footing heights. Pour foot- ings to a height that will re- duce the need to cut blocks or shim when building pe- rimeter walls and piers. r ZZ Backfilling. Backfill against basement walls only after the home is connected to the foundation or the basement walls may deflect inward or collapse. Set the Home This chapter describes the process of installing the first section of the home (for single section homes this is the only sec- tion) onto the foundation. STEP 1. PREPARE FOR SET (p. 38) . STEP 2 POSITION HOME SECTIM (p: 38), STEP 3. LIFT HOME (p.'38) ; STEP 4. CONSTRUCT PIERS-(p. 40) STEP 1. PREPARE FOR SET Before beginning the home set, complete the following: • Confirm that the site is properly cleared and graded (see Prepare the Site, p. 15. • Ensure that the footings are in place and properly located. • Install any utilities that will be difficult to install (e.g. those below grade be- neath the home) after the home is in place. • Secure or remove from the home and properly store all ship loose items (refer to shipping documents for items shipped with the home). • Inspect the home interior, exterior and all provided materials, appliances and equipment. Immediately report any damage or shortages to the manufacturer. For perimeter bearing wall foundations: • Check that the actual length and width of the home matches the foundation walls. • Check that the two main diagonal measurements of the foundation are equal. • Check that the foundation walls and other support points are within 1/4 inch of level overall and within 1/8 inch of level within any four foot distance. • For multi -section homes, check that each pair of diagonal measurements for each portion of the foundation corresponding to a home section are equal. • For multi -section homes, find the electrical bonding lugs on the front or rear outriggers. Reverse them to the inside of the outrigger so they will be access- ible after the home is placed on the foundation walls. • If using a cross beam system, remove the frame's shackle hanger if it will in- terfere with proper placement of the beam. STEP 2. POSITION HOME SECTION Position the home section in its final location (if possible, move the heaviest section of the home into place first). Then place materials needed to construct support piers near their final locations under the home as determined in Install Footings, (p. 20). STEP 3. LIFT HOME There are three primary methods available to place the home on the foundation: jack- ing, rolling and craning. Jacks, often with roller systems, are typically used for pier and anchor foundations; roller systems are commonly used for crawlspace foundations with load bearing perimeter walls; and cranes are most commonly used for basement foun- dations. JACKS If jacks are to be used, comply with all jacking safety precautions and the procedure below. Lifting the home with jacks involves potential risks and must be done with ut- i // Clearances under the home. After the home is leveled, the resulting dis- tance between the bottom of the entire chassis main frame beam and the ground must be no less than 12 inches. Utilize proper cribbing. Homes weigh several tons. No one should be under the home (whether it is moving or stationary) unless proper cribbing is in place (Figure 15). Fail- ure to utilize proper crib- bing may result in serious injury or death. Leveling During Jacking. Keep the home's floor as level as possible during jacking. Twisting or warping the floor can dam- age the structure and finish- ing. Use as many jacks as necessary to keep the floor flat and level. M most care and caution. Failure to follow jacking warnings and procedures may result in serious injury or death. Please read the Jacking Safety Precautions before lifting the home with jacks. • No one shoultl+6e under the home's l-beams while the jacks are being op'erat- ed•orwhile the home is supported only on the jacks. •` Use acks,onl for raising`the home. Do not"rel , on the jacks to support the•' I j Y Y , home. •' ,, If possible, raise 'the.home only on=_one side so thafthe other side is in contact with the ground. Leave the hitch connected to the vehicle or other stabilizing, equipment," . Obey. all OSHA regulations. l • _ Make sure adequate safety cribbing (Figure 15) is in place whenever the, home is placed on jacks. 1, Use a minimum of two commercial�quality, jacks,_each with a rating of at least i41 12 tons. - • . Jack only on themain chassis I-beam, centering jacks directly under the beam. • Do not jack on a seam (joint between flanges of twin 1-beams). ` • = To.distribute`the,'concentrated IoadS,fr'om.jacks to I-beam, place a minimum 3/8-inch thick steel plate, a C-channel, a 1 %-inch thick hardwood block or a i commercial jacking plate,,, between the main chassis I-beam and, the jack head. • Locate the jack base on firm ground Neverjack on freshly disturbed soil or where an underground. sewer pipe may be, located. f • ° Use a firmsupport under the jack 6ase.to preveni tipping or settling .of the jack.` A minimum 16 -x 16" or larger°wood or rigid fiberglass pad is recommended. ` NeVer'u"se concrete blocks as a support fovea jack' ° ` • . 'Never use jacks that are leaking or are in need of repair. a Follow the jacking sequence outlined below to avoid overstressing structural members: 1. Block wheels. Block the wheels so the house does not roll. 2. Install cribbing. Install safety cribbing (Figure 15) Figure 15. Stack 4" x 6" by 5' long timbers as shown to form safety timbers. Place safety timbers under home behind axle area and under hitch. 3. Level lengthwise. Locate one jack at the hitch and level the section leng- thwise (such that the front and rear of the section are at the same height). 4. Locate frame jacks. Place a minimum of one jack in front of the first spring hanger and another just behind the last spring hanger of the I-beam on the side of the home that is lowest (making sure not to place jacks where the piers will go). Place jacks no more than 20 feet apart and no more than 20 feet from each end of the I-beam. 5. Lift the home. Operating the jacks simultaneously (or sequentially in very small increments), lift the home section until it is slightly higher than the final desired pier height. W ROLLER SYSTEMS When using a roller system, comply with the equipment manufacturer's directions and the following sequence: 1. Establish staging area. Establish a staging area directly adjacent to one or both sides of the foundation. 2. Setup rollers. Set up the roller system according to the equipment manufac- turer's directions. 3. Fasten bump blocks. Temporarily fasten wooden bump blocks on the sill plates at the ends of the foundation to stop the home from rolling at the de- sired location. 4. Roll home. Roll the home into place over the foundation. 5. Remove bump blocks. Remove the blocks before installing the next section of a multi -section home. CRANES When using a crane, follow these guidelines: • Position the home section(s) and crane (taking the boom reach into consider- ation) such that they do not have to be repositioned during the set. • Use enough properly sized straps to maintain balance of the home and to prevent damage to the structure. • Place straps under walls or posts, including temporary posts used to support the opening. Do not position lifting straps under marriage wall openings. • Use a properly sized spreader bar to maintain a vertical lift, to avoid placing compression forces on the eaves and to reduce any tendency to slip. • Connect a rope to at least one point on the home so it can be controlled while aloft. • Make provisions to retrieve the straps/cables after the home is set. If using a cradle system, notch the sill plate where the straps will fall. For a sling sys- tem, notch and reinforce the home's rim joist to keep the strap from slipping and allow the strap to be removed after the home is set. • Always set the home section farthest from the crane first so that subsequent section(s) need not be lifted over previously set sections. STEP 4. CONSTRUCT PIERS For the side of the home section that is up on jacks, place piers on footings or pads fol- lowing the home manufacturer's blocking plan (or tags). If no plan was provided, use the support plan developed in Install Footings (p. 20). Start at one end of the home section and work toward the other noting the required pier material specifications and procedure described below. Construct piers so as to provide a stable foundation for the home using materials listed in the specifications box below and based on the location of the pier and its height as measured from the top of the footing, pad or grade to the top of the cap, The pier height can be measured from the lowest surrounding grade to the top of the cap when grade level is above the top of the footing. See Table 12 for pier construction require- ments. / // No one should be under the home while it is suspended. Never put your hands be- tween the home and the pe- rimeter walls. V?iyVZA Designing piers. Incorrect size, location or spacing of piers may result in serious structural damage to the home. Install piers at all re- quired locations. Failure to do so may lead to sagging floors, walls and roofs, and could void the home's war- ranty. 40 TAG1 C 44 DICG MATFRIAI Mimilin IM RPFCIFICOTInNS Component ' , �a� , -'� , r ' . '3 . Specification.' , Concrete Block Nominal dimensions of at least 8" x 8" x 16"; confirming to ASTM designation C90 Solid masonry(nominal 4 x 8 x 16 'pre cast concrete without reinforcement) treated or hardwood lumber.` Caps (nominal 2; x 8 x 16) or steel (minimu/27 thick corrosion protected by a min of a 10 mil coating of an ..`ezterwr paint or equivalent) Spacers Hardwood plates no thicker than 2" nominal or 4" nominal concrete block used to fill vertical gaps. When required nominal 4 inch by 6 trich by 1 inch (max. verticahheight) wood shims used in pairs =Some Shims (also called wedg states counties townships and or murncipalities may ri gwre the�use ofiardwood or treated lumbeh� es) a ,,g ;q' n_ , : shims ";Other list@6shims may be used if,installed iri accofdance;with the;listing (max loatl capacityj. _ Available in various sizes stamped with maximum load capacity and listed or labeled for the required verti- cal load capacity, and, where required by design, for the appropriate horizontal load capacity. Metal or Commercial metal or pre- other manufactured piers must be provided with protection against weather deterioration and corrosion at cast concrete piers least equivalent to that provided by a coating of zinc on steel of .30 oz per sq. ft of surface coated. Manu- factured pier heights must be selected so that the adjustable risers do not extend more than 2 inches. V�/ith a water borne °preservative in accordanco Nnth AWPA Standard U1-04 for Use Category 4B ground `- Pressure; treated wood contact applications~ t ''AI TABLE 12 PIER CONSTRUCTION _; ` maximum offset: w Maximum Load,(lbs) , Pier, location Height Conflauratlon top to bottom , :° Without; Mortar, With Mortar = Single stack blocks with long Less than 36 in * side perpendicular to frame %" 6,500 7,680 I-beam _ ' Between 36 in and 67 in, Double interlocked blocks 1 F _ 13 OOO lbs 15 360 =Frameyu e A " _1 Between 36 in and 67 in Triple, interlocked blocks 1" 19,500 lbs. 23,034 Between 68 in and 10,8 in Dou61e interlocked rein 1 NA 39,500 forced blocks° Single stack blocks with long Perimeter 54 in or less ** side parallel to perimeter rail ''/z' 6,500 7,680 (rim joist) Sing 16 stack blocks wit, ong Marriage, line 54 in or, less** �. . �° ,side perpendicular to the `' %' 6;500 7,680 w marriage line * Single stack piers may be constructed up to 54" max. height only when installed as perimeter and marriage line support piers. ** Cross reference maximum allowable pier height with maximum allowable floor height listed in frame tiedown charts. If maximum height listed in frame tiedown charts is exceeded, then designs must be provided by a registered professional en- gineer or registered architect. Maximum horizontal offset of/Z' allowed for pier heights up to 36" and a V offset allowed for pier heights between 36" and 67". Prepare footing surface. Make sure the footing surface upon which the pier sits is flat and smooth. Before placing the pier on the footing, clean dirt, rocks or other material off the surface of the footing. If the footing surface is uneven, create a level, flat surface by mortaring on the first block (or manufactured pier base) or by placing the first block (or manufactured pier base) on a layer of premix dry sand mortar. Stack blocks. Stack concrete blocks with their hollow cells aligned vertically. When piers are constructed of blocks stacked side -by -side, orient each layer at right angles to the previous one (Figure 16) and plan blocks so that split caps will be perpendicular to the blocks they rest on and perpendicular to the main I-beam. i 41 VOTTE 1 MAIN I -BEAM � SHIM m SPACER` CAP m � rn a CONCRETE w _ BLOCK_� in J3T:: TYPICAL FOOTING SINGLE STACK DOUBLE STACK PIER PIER TRIPLE STACK PIER SHIM SPACER CAP REINFORCE — PIER WITH (4) #4 VERTICAL REBAR. GROUT CELLS SOLID TO FOOTING. CONCRETE FOOTING BELOW FROST LINE. REINFORCED WITH (3) #4 REBAR EACH WAY REINFORCED DOUBLE STACK PIER 3. Cap piers. Place a cap on hollow block piers to evenly distribute the structural load. Use caps the same length and width as the piers they rest upon. When using split caps on double -stacked block piers, install the caps with the long dimension perpendicular to the joint in the blocks below and perpendicular to the main I-beam. 4. 5. Install shims. Use shims to level the home and fill any gaps between the base of the I-beam and the top of the pier cap. When required, always use shims in pairs (Figure 17). Drive them in tightly so they do not occupy more than one inch of vertical space. When the space to be shimmed is greater than one inch and less than the minimum thickness of available caps or con- crete blocks, use hardwood dimensional lumber (two inches maximum thick- ness) or 4" thick concrete block. For split caps, install shims and dimensional lumber/blocks over each individual cap. Two cap blocks may be used as the cap on double block piers provided the joint between the cap blocks is per- pendicular to the joint between the open cell concrete blocks and is also per- pendicular to the I-beam supported by the pier. .. , „I,,,,.y., i i 'do ��'••. 0 �, Q..••• g5� OF: Set up level. Set up a water level with the fluid level at the desired height of the main piers. Carefully lower the side of the section down onto the leveled piers, adjusting the final height with shims. 42 MIN. DIAMETER OF BEND SHALL BE 3" AS MEASURED FROM INSIDE OF REINFORCING BARS WITH A 6" LONG MIN. LEG. Figure 16. Frame pier con- struction. i // Curing time of mortar. Where wet mortar is used to construct or level piers, al- lowed it to cure to at least 80% of strength capacity (usually requiring 96 hours) before setting the home. Correct shim '%r Dimensions of masonry perimeter walls. If using a masonry perimeter enclosure, calculate pier heights so that the enclo- sure can be built using standard unit dimensions (without cutting). / A Level the home. The home is adequately leveled if there is no more than 1/4 inch differ- ence between adjacent pier supports (frame or perime- ter) and the exterior doors and windows of the home do ;How to use a water level a. ,Position level. Position the'level',such that it can reach all piers. I b. Place container. Place the container so that the fluid in the con-' taine'r is at the same level as the desired level of the top of the 1 supports under the home allowing for.any•bracing. below the lev of.the, 1=bebms. c. Uncoil tubing. Uncoil the tubing' and fill with fluid, taking care noti • to introduce bubbles into the hose. Never allow anything to' crimp ,G { or crush the tubing so as to impede the free flow of fluid. i d. Bleed air. Hold the valve below the level of the water container;, open the valve to bleed out.any air and close the valve. 3e. Establish height. Locate the tubing adjacent to a pier that is set to the desired final height. Position the valve above the pier and open the valve. Move the water container up or down to where i the water level is at the desired final, height of the pier. Maintain , the water container in that position`andclose the valve., f.' Level pies. Move, the tubing to -the next'pier.,.Hold the valve (. •above,the, pier and, open it. Set the`pie'r height to the level -of the " i water in the tubing and close the valve. Repeat this step until all, _ piers are at the same level. 'g. Note: If water leaks out of the system while in. use, you must re- position the reservoir and begin tlieprocess again i Complete the opposite side. Jack the other side of the section up and install piers following the instructions above. At the completion of this step, the sec- tion should be level from front to rear and from side to side. Install perimeter and marriage line piers. Install perimeter piers and for multi -section homes, marriage line piers. Position marriage line piers to pro- vide equal bearing for both mating sections. 8. Remove running gear. Remove and store, recycle or properly dispose of the hitch, axles and wheels. These items are the property of the homeowner un- less other contractual arrangements have been made. not bind and can be properly operated. If differences in pier heights occur, drain lines should be inspected to correct reverse slope situa- tions. Water level operation. To operate the water level properly, both ends of the system must be open to the atmosphere and there must be approximately the same amount of fluid in the tubing at all times (within a few inches). 43 Complete Multi -Section Set This chapter covers the preparation and installation of additional home sections, including the structural connections be- tween units, raising and fastening hinged roofs and fastening the home to a load bearing perimeter wall foundation. STEP 1. INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE ANCHORS If the home is in Wind Zone II or III, install ground anchors along the marriage line now; before mating sections are joined see Install Stabilizing System (p. 74). After in- stalling marriage line anchors return to this point in Complete Multi -Section Set. STEP 2. REMOVE PROTECTIVE SHIPPING MATERIALS Remove all shipping protection and associated fasteners from both home sections to be joined, including plastic used to close up the open sides during transportation. Do Checklists for alternate construction. If the not remove the temporary supports holding up the ceilings at major openings. Wind serial number (see the data plate wrap (such as Tyvek or other similar product) will be installed over the exterior wall or the chassis front cross OSB sheathing and under the shipping plastic. Be careful not to damage the wind wrap member) has the letters when removing the shipping plastic. "AC" before or after it, then the Alternate Construction STEP 3. COMPLETE HINGED ROOF on -site check list supplied If the home has a hinged roof that has been folded down for shipping, refer to Appen- with the home must be dix D for hinged truss installation information. completed and returned to the home manufacturer in a timely manner. If the AC checklist relates to the roof, then failure to do so may require future disassembly of the roof and further in- spections. 44 STEP 4. REPAIR OR INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE GASKET A continuous, non -porous gasket creating a permanent air barrier will be installed on at least one side of the marriage line; along the floor, end walls and ceiling (and marriage lines for any tag units). The manufacturer has provided a marriage line gasket either Checking through -the -rim - installed on the home or shipped loose. If installed, inspect the gasket and repair any ducts. Ensure that through - gaps or tears. the -rim -duct connections If not installed at the factory, install a continuous gasket between the home sections are secure and tight after along the floor, end walls and ceiling. the home sections are to - For homes with through -the -rim crossover ducts (see Connect Crossovers, p.61) in- gether. spect and if necessary, repair gaskets around the rim joist duct openings using 3/4 inch thick fiberglass duct board or other material acceptable to the manufacturer. Ensure that duct openings are unobstructed. STEP 5. POSITION ADDITIONAL HOME SECTIONS Follow this procedure to install additional home sections: 1. Remove obstructions. Remove protruding nails and staples or anything else @Mechanical that will keep the home sections from fitting together snugly. If present, cut the temporary ceiling and floor plates at the edges of marriage line openings tak- posi- ing care not to damage ceiling or floor coverings or displace temporary mar- tioning system. For a pier- riage line support posts (these supports and the plates will be removed after set home, a mechanical the home sections have been structurally connected). positioning system (such as 2. Complete crossovers. Before moving the two sections together, complete a roller system) will make any crossover connections that require access from the open marriage line, the process easier and sa- including the attic duct connection (if present) and marriage wall interior elec- fer and be less likely to trical connections (see Connect Crossovers, p.61). damage the home. 3. Position section. Position the section as closely as possible (ideally within six inches) and line up with the previously set section. If using a mechanical positioning system or crane, follow the system manufacturer's instructions or the crane operator's directions. 4. Construct piers. With the outside walls of the home aligned, construct the Safety. Remember to place safety timbers under home piers for the home section according to the instructions in Set the Home behind axle area and under (p.38) before continuing to the steps below. hitch. 5. Level section. Lower the section onto the outside piers first, inside piers last. Before releasing the mechanical positioning system, check interior doorways and other openings for misalignments that may cause problems during trim - out. The floors should be flush, level and tight and the roof section should have little, if any, gap at the top of the marriage line. Use at least two come -a- Sealing gaps. Prior to com- longs to pull the sections snugly together and use the water level or other pletion of the exterior close - leveling device to set all piers and shims. up, gaps that do not exceed 6. Shim gaps. Shim any gaps up to one inch between structural elements with one inch are permitted be - dimensional lumber. If any gaps exceed one inch, re -position the home to tween structural elements provided that the gaps are eliminate such gaps. closed before completion of STEP 6. CONNECT FLOORS close-up, the home sec- tions are in contact with each other; and the mar- Make floor structural connections according to the appropriate method described below. riage gasket provides a proper seal. A sealing gasket shall be present between marriage line rim joists. Alternate 1: Toed fasteners through bottom board Make connections according to the fastener specifications in Table 13 and Figure 18. Fasteners on each side of marriage line shall be staggered and offset by twice the spacing distance (Figure 18A). Repair any tears or holes in the bottom board after installation of fasteners. 45 TABLE 13. FLOOR CONNECTION FASTENING SPECIFICATIONS La 3i6.. x 3-1/z"- 9 screw 6-1/2" 24 in. 24 in. 24 in. MAY BE SINGLE OR r%nI ICI C OI\I — — TAPE OVER BOTTOM BOARD DAMAGE FASTENER LOCATION MARRIAGE LINE f SPACING 2x SPACING TABLE FROM TABLE XFROM �—X 2x SPACING FROM TABLE 2x SPACING FROM TABLE X X 2x SPACING SPACING FROM TABLE FROM TABLE i Additional fastening requirements: • Wind Zones 2 and 3 require metal strap per specifications below. • Fasteners to be installed at approximately a 45 degree angle from horizontal. • Two additional fasteners are required at each end of the home. • One additional fastener is required at each side of through -the -rim crossover duct openings. • Increase fastener length by three inches for double rim joists. • Lags to include washer. Figure 18. Floor connection through bottom board Figure 18A. Staggered off- set fastening along marriage line -+U Metal strap and fastening specifications (required for Wind Zones 2 and 3): • Strap to be min 26ga 1-1/2" wide galvanized steel strap spaced per Ta- ble 13A and. Table 13B. Strap length shall be sufficient to hold the re- quired fasteners (Figure 18B). TABLE 13A. MAXIMUM STRAP SPACING 26 ga. x 1-1/2" 32 in. 32 in. 26 ga x 2 48 irr�� 48 TABLE 13B. STRAP FASTENING MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS 26 ga. x 1-1/2 3/8" x 3-1/2" Lag Screw 1 each side SEE CHART METAL MARRIAGE LII STEP 7. CONNECT WALLS 3T � MARRIAGE LINE LAG SCREWS — PER TABLE 13B LAG SCREWS PER TABLE 13 METAL STRAP Make wall structural connections according to the appropriate method described below. Bolt or lag end studs behind sheathing Make connections by installing fasteners in the end wall (Figure 19) according to the fastener specifications and spacing requirements in Table 14, and the following re- quirements: • For bolts, predrill holes and use washers both sides and nuts. • After the walls have been connected, install the exterior wall sheathing pa- nels if they were shipped loose. Install shipped loose sheathing using min 15ga x 7/16" x 1-1/2" staples or 6d nails spaced 2 inches o.c for OSB and 3 inches o.c . for other exterior materials to all horizontal and vertical framing members. APPROXIMATE CENTER OF STI 47 FASTENERS Figure 18B. Strapping at marriage line floor connec- tion IIN Figure 19. Endwall connec- tion TABLE 14. END WALL CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS Fastener Type Lag Screw r _ Studs Double Size i+�L`OGa11115.111; ns 3/8" x 6" Top, center, bottom Bolt; Double P 3/8' x 77 or;1/2 x 7" oTop, center bottom- Lag Screw Single 3/8" x 3" Top, center, bottom Bolt, Single. 3l8 x 6 gi 1/2" x b"' .Top ;center bQft Wood Screw' Any # 8 x 4" 6" + 1/2' o.c. *ALTERNATIVE SHOWN IN FIGURE 19A. All sheathing is installed in manufactruring facility. (Pre -drilled holes may be present as a result of the manufacturing process.) Mate line is secured with #8 x 4" wood screws over sheathing. Refer to above chart for fastener spacing. Wood screws are toe -nailed. Entry should begin approximately 1-5/16" from mate line. Screw should penetrate at approxi- mately a 30-degree angle. Screw must achieve 1-1/2" penetration into side member. WALL COVERING APPLIED AT MANUFACTURING FACILITY 7 #8 x 4" WOOD SCREWS_ INSTALLED ON ALTERNATING SIDES OF THE MATE LINE APPROX.1-5/16" PENETRATION 1-1/2" �p4llsl II tifa rr AGRiCU •o •'���'T,••"�0"1• Figure 19A. Toe -screwed altemative fastening 48 STEP 8. CONNECT ROOF MULTI SECTION HOME RIDGE LINE Make roof structural connections according to the appropriate method described below. If the home has a hinged roof, see also the section on hinge roof raising and fastening. Standard Ridge Bolts Install a %" bolt, (2) 15/16" washers and nuts in all pre -drilled holes in the ridge beam. Bolts, washers and nuts will be provided by the manufacturer. Single bolt holes will be pre -drilled by the manufacturer at intervals of 12" to 48" along the length of the ridge beam. Wind Zone II & III Requirements (Also a requirement in Wind Zone I when the roof decking is the diaphragm) Additional straps and screws are required as shown on the following pages. These straps and screws are in addition to the bolts discussed above. 49 INSTALL CONTINUOUS 30GA 6" (MIN) STEEL ROOF CAP WITH (2) #8 x 1-1/2" SCREWS EACH TRUSS WITH TRUSSES 16" O.C. OR (3) #8 x 1-1/2" SCREWS EACH TRUSS WITH TRUSSES 24" O.C. TRUSS TOP CHORD CONTINUOUS ALTERNATE #1 WOOD BLOCKING OR RIDGEBEAM EACH HALF 26GA 1-1/2" STRAP SPACED: • 96" O.C. (MAX) FOR WIND ZONE I & II • 80" O.C. (MAX) FOR WIND ZONE III SECURE EACH END OF EACH STRAP WITH: (10)15GA x 1-1/2" STAPLES OR (10) 0.099" x I"NAILS OR (10) 0.120" x 1-1/4" NAILS OR (7) 0.131" x 1-1/4" NAILS #10 x 4" SCREWS SPACED 12" O.C. (STAGGERED FROM SIDE TO SIDE AT 30 DEGREE ANGLE FROM VERTICAL 2x SPF #2 MIN FASTENED TO EACH TRUSS WITH: (5) .131" x 3" NAILS OR (10)15GA 7/16" x 2-1/2" STAPLES W/ TRUSSES 24" O.C. (ZONE I & II OPTION) OR (4) .131"x 3" NAILS OR (8)15GA 7/16" x 2-1/2" STAPLES W/ TRUSSES 16" O.C. ALTERNATE #2 (ZONE II OR ZONE III) (TYP EACH HALF) 2" (MAX) AND 1" (MIN)AIR-GAP BETWEEN ROOF DECKING AND 2x EDGERAIL CONTINUOUS WOOD BLOCKING OR RIDGEBEAM EACH HALF. THICKNESS NOT TO EXCEED 1-1/2" WIND ZONE II AND III ROOF CONNECTIONS (USE IN WIND ZONE I WHEN ROOF DECKING IS THE DIAPHRAGM) ROOF DECKING TRUSS TOP CHORD TRUSS KINGPOST— RIDGEBEAM 6" (MIN) CEMENT REQUIRED BENEATH UNDERLAYMENTi AT PEAK (REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS BELOW) Figure 20. Roof connection - Alternate #2 must be used with Ridge Vents SHINGLE UNDERLAYMENT 'r AGIttCU URE B+ OF HOME i 0� INSTRUCTIONS: 1. THE TEMPORARY PIECE OF DECKING MATERIAL IS TO BE REMOVED ALONG THE RIDGE OF HOME TO ALLOW THE INSTALLATION OF THE RIDGE BEAM CONNECTING BOLTS. 2. AFTER RIDGEBEAM BOLTS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED, SECURE DECKING MATERIAL BACK IN PLACE WITH 15GA 1-1/2" STAPLES 2-1/2" O.C. INTO TRUSS TOP CHORDS OR 8D NAILS 2-1/2" O.C. INTO TRUSS TOP CHORDS. 3. BEFORE INSTALLING SHINGLES AT RIDGE PEAK, YOU MUST CEMENT THE UNDERLAYMENT TO THE ROOF DECKING WITH 6" (MIN) CEMENT STRIP ALONG THE PEAK OF THE ROOF ON BOTH HALVES OF THE HOME. 4. SHINGLES MAY THEN BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. SHINGLE UNDERLAYMENT AND CEMENT APPLICATION AT ROOF PEAK .JV #10 x 4" SCREWS SPACED 10" O.C. (STAGGERED FROM SIDE TO SIDE AT 30 DEGREE ANGLE FROM VERTICAL 2x SPF #2 MIN FASTENED TO EACH TRUSS WITH: (5) .131" x 3" NAILS OR (10)15GA 7/16" x 2-1/2" STAPLES W/ TRUSSES 24" O.C. (4) .131"x 3" NAILS OR (8)15GA 7/16" x 2-1/2" STAPLES W/ TRUSSES 16" O.C. (TYP EACH HALF) ALTERNATE #3 2" (MAX) AND 1" (MIN) AIR GAP BETWEEN ROOF DECKING AND 2x EDGERAIL. DECKING TO EXTEND TO PEAK WHEN RIDGE VENT NOT INSTALLED IN THAT AREA. BLOCKING OR RIDGEBEAM EACH HALF. THICKNESS NOT TO EXCEED 1-1/2" TRADITIONAL RIDGEBEAM BOLTS ARE NOT REQUIRED 51 Figure 20A. Roof connection - Alternate #3 with ceiling board diaphragm e _ AGItiCU, LIRE 26GA 1-1/2" STRAPS SPACED: 1) 80" O.C. (MAX) FOR 24" O/C TRUSSES IN WIND ZONE 1 & 16' 0/C TRUSSES IN WIND ZONE 2 AND 2) 72" O.C. (MAX) FOR 24" O/C TRUSSES IN WIND ZONE 2 & 16' 0/C TRUSSES IN WIND ZONE 3. SECURE EACH END OF EACH STRAP WITH: (10) 15GA x 1-1/2" STAPLES OR (10) 0.099' x 1' NAILS OR (10) 0.120" x 1-1/4" NAILS OR (7) 0.131" x 1-1/4" NAILS #10 x 4" SCREWS SPACED 5" O.C. (STAGGERED FROM SIDE TO SIDE AT 30 DEGREE ANGLE FROM VERTICAL. SCREWS MAY BE INSTALLED THROUGH DECKING PROVIDED A 1-1/2" MINIMUM PENETRATION IS MAINTAINED INTO THE WOOD BLOCKING. —� 2x SPF #2 MIN FASTENED TO EACH TRUSS. WITH: (5) .131" x 3" NAILS OR (10)15GA 7/16" x 2-1/2" STAPLES W/ TRUSSES 24" O.C. (ZONE I $ II OPTION) OR ALTERNATE #4 (4) .131" x 3" NAILS OR (8)15GA 7/16" x 2-112' STAPLES W/ TRUSSES 16" O.C. (ZONE II OR ZONE III) (TYP EACH HALF) ROOF TRUSS TOP CHORD TRUSS KINGPOST— OF HOME 2" (MAX) AND 1" (MIN) AIR GAP BETWEEN ROOF DECKING AND 2x EDGERAIL. DECKING TO EXTEND TO PEAK WHEN RIDGE VENT NOT INSTALLED IN THAT AREA. CONTINUOUS WOOD BLOCKING EACH HALF. THICKNESS NOT TO EXCEED 1-1/2" TRADITIONAL RIDGEBEAM BOLTS -ARE. NOT REQUIRED Figure 20B. Roof connection- Altermate#4 with roof decking diaphragm 6' (MIN) CEMENT REQUIRED BENEATH UNDERLAYMENT AT PEAK (REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS BELOW) UNDERLAYMENT INSTRUCTIONS: 1. THE TEMPORARY PIECE OF DECKING MATERIAL MAY BE REMOVED ALONG THE RIDGE OF HOME TO ALLOW THE INSTALLATION OF THE CONNECTING SCREWS. 2. AFTER SCREWS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED, SECURE DECKING MATERIAL BACK IN PLACE WITH 15GA 1-1/2' STAPLES 2-1/2" O.C. INTO TRUSS TOP CHORDS OR 8D NAILS 2-1/2" O.C. INTO TRUSS TOP CHORDS. 3. BEFORE INSTALLING SHINGLES AT RIDGE PEAK, YOU MUST CEMENT THE UNDERLAYMENT TO THE ROOF DECKING WITH 6" (MIN) CEMENT STRIP ALONG THE PEAK OF THE ROOF ON BOTH HALVES OF THE HOME. 4. SHINGLES MAY THEN BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. SHINGLE UNDERLAYMENT AND CEMENT APPLICATION AT ROOF PEAK V • ♦ tl, �1 Y �r ~ AGltlCU URE00, op T:EI JL This page intentionally left blank. 53 STEP 9. ATTACH TAG UNITS After the main unit has been set on its foundation, install all tag units according to the following procedure: i // 1. Position and block the tag. Position the tag unit as close to the main unit as possible at its intended -location. Use a hitch jack to obtain a 1 approximate leve- ling and install pier supports according to Set the Home, STEP 2. POSITION Piers under tag units. Some tag units have spe- HOME SECTION (p. 38). Determine whether the tag and main unit floors are needs due to designed to line up flush or are offset b a step and adjust the to y p g pier heights the roof an the roof and/or floor con- accordingly. struction. These will be de - 2. Level the unit. Using a water level (p.42), verify that the piers are level. The tailed in supplemental pier- ing plans supplied with the elevation of all points along the lower flange of the I-beam should be a no home. Note that tag unit more than 3/8 inches from the desired height and should not deviate more than 3/4 inches overall. end walls are typically load 3. Connect floors. If the floor of the tag unit is level with main unit floor, connect bearing rather than side walls. the floors together as described in STEP 6. CONNECT FLOORS (p. 45). If the floors are offset, use the connection detail shown in Figure 21. 4. Connect walls. Secure the tag unit walls to the main unit sidewall using #10 x 4" screws at 24 inches o.c. If pre -drilled holes are provided secure the tag unit walls to the main unit with 5/16" x 6" lag screws (see Figure 22). The sheath- ing shown in the detail may not be included by the manufacturer. If included, the sheathing over the last stud bay was tacked in place at the factory for easy removal at the site. Once the wall connections are complete, re -install the sheathing and complete the siding installation. FLOOR MATING LINE SIDEWALL STUDS FASTENER Figure 21. Tag unit offset DECKING (MAIN UNIT) SHEATHING floor connection 2x FLOOR JOIST 2x6 SPF #2 -J BLOCKING (FIELD INSTALLED) WALL STUDS Figure 22. Tag unit wall `r w (TAG UNIT) connection LAG SCREW EDGE RAIL TO NY FLOOR BLOCKING PER STANDARD DECKING MAIN FLOOR CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS UNIT R-11 MIN. INSULATION 2x FLOOR IN KNEEWALL VERT. FLOOR DECKING / JOIST XTERIOR COVERED WITH EITHER BOTTOM TAG SIDING BOARD OR ALUMINUM FLASHING UNIT 5. Connect roofs. Connect the tag unit roof to the main unit roof using #10 x 4" screws at 12" on -center (8" on -center in Wind Zone 3) or #8 x 4" screws at 8" on -center (5" on -center in Wind Zone 3) toe screwed through tag unit end truss top chord into each main unit dormer vertical structural member location (stud or truss). If full depth ridgebeam headers must be connected refer to Connect Roofs. See Figure 23 for flush roof connections and Figure 24 for roof connections with an offset greater than two inches. Roof connections with an offset less than two inches do not require screws. 54 SHINGLE INSTALL FLASHING MAIN UNDERLAYMENT (OR ADDITIONAL UNIT — _ z �—SHINGLES YER OF METAL FASCIA FASTENER UNDERLAYMENT) FLAT OVER JOINT ROOF DECKING SHINGLES TAG MAIN METAL FLASHING -- UNIT UNIT (ORTOP COURSE ROOF OF VINYL SIDING) DECKING TAG FASTENER UNIT STEP 10. REMOVE TEMPORARY ITEMS Once the home is properly supported and the marriage line connections are completed, remove the temporary ridge beam supports and wall/ceiling plates used to brace the ridge beam during shipment. Take care not to damage the ceiling. STEP 11. FASTEN HOME TO FOUNDATION Fasten the home to the foundation according to the fastening schedule provided in Construct Foundation, STEP 1. OBTAIN A FOUNDATION DESIGN (p.35). STEP 12. BACKFILL AND GRADE Backfill against the foundation wall to the height of the waterproofing, taking care to not damage the drainage system. Grade the site as described in Prepare the Site, STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE (p.16). STEP 13. BUILD STAIRS Construct the basement stairs in compliance with the local building code. Take care that adequate headroom is maintained under beams and that there is sufficient landing space at the bottom of the stairs. Figure 23. Tag unit flush roof connection Figure 24. Tag unit offset roof connection V&##Z,ZJ When to backfill. Backfill against basement walls on- ly after the home is con- nected to the foundation or the basement walls may deflect inward or collapse. Cutting the chassis. Do not cut, notch, bend or alter in any manner beams, cross - members and other parts of the steel chassis. 55 Complete Roof and Exterior Walls This chapter covers closing up and weatherproofing the home by completing the roofing and siding. ` ., ROOF. (p. 56) . � STEP 1. COMPLETE STEP 2. COMPLETE TAG UNIT ROOF (p. 58) , ,tee• v STEP 3. COMPLETE SIDE WALLS; (p. 60) STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF RIDGE CLOSEUP For multi -section homes, the first step in completing the exterior is sealing the roof along the ridge line (Figure 25). For homes with asphalt shingles, follow the procedure below. For homes with metal or other roofing materials, follow the instructions that come with the roofing materials or provided as a supplement to this manual. CAP SHINGLE ' UNDERLAYMENT SHINGLE AND UNDERLAYMENT SHEATHING 1. Install underlayment. Sheathing must be fastened with an 8d nail at 6 inches on -center along the edges and 12 inches on -center in the field. Seams of field in- stalled sheathing must be offset 16 inches from the seams on factory installed sheathing. Install 15# felt or equivalent continuously along the length of the ridge, covering all exposed sheathing and overlapping sheathing joints by at least five inches on each side. Fasten using 1" x 1" x 16 ga galvanized staples. For Wind Zones II and III, also apply a six inch wide strip of roofing cement along each side of ridge under the underlayment. 2. Install shingles. If shingles have been left off at the ridge line for site installation, install them now using 12 ga x 1-1/4" long, 3/8" diameter head roof nails or 16 ga 1" crown x 1" length staples. For Wind Zone I, fasten at 5/8 inch above each tab cutout slot and one at each end of the shingle one inch in from the edge (four fasteners for a three -tab shingle) (Figure 26). For Wind Zones II and III, use two fasteners 5/8 inch above and on either side of the tab slots and one at each end of the shingle one inch in from the edge (six fasteners for a three -tab shingle). Do not fasten through the shingle tar line. 36" SHINGLE- f -36" SHINGLE -i L�]..............................x...........................x. 12".x.........................X...x........................x...X........................x. 12" " FASTENER LOCATIONS 3. Install underlayment. Install 15# felt or equivalent underlayment that is at least 10 inches wide continuously along the ridge. Fasten with 1" x 1" x 16 ga galvanized staples. For Wind Zones II and III, also apply a six inch wide strip of roofing ce- Figure 25. Shingle installa- tion at ridge Weatherproofing. It is vital- ly important to close up the home quickly to protect the interior from damage due to inclement weather. Removing shipping protec- tion. Remove shipping pro- tection from the roof prior to completing roofing.Seal all holes in shingles resulting from shipping protection re- moval. It is also recom- mended that the top layer of shingles be lifted and the sealant applied to any holes in the second layer of shin- gles. Refer to Warning on following page for accept- able types of sealants. Figure 26.Shingle fastener locations for Wind Zone l (left) and Wind Zones ll and 111 (right). 56 ment on both sides of the ridge under the underlayment. 4. Install shingle cap. Starting at the opposite end of the home from the prevailing wind, install ridge cap shingles provided by the manufacturer or use 12" x 12" shingles (36" shingles cut into three equal pieces) (Figure 27). Install using 12 ga x 1-1/4" long, 3/8" diameter head roofing nails spaced 5-5/8 inches from bottom edge and 1/2 inch to 1-1/2 inches in from both edges. Cover the exposed fasten- ers with tar or cement. CUT SHINGLE INTO THREE PIECES AS SHOWN BY DOTTED LINE 1�213 5. Ridge Vent. For proper alignment — prenail through ridge vent holes at ends of each section. The felt paper underlayment should be folded back onto the roof decking and trimmed along the edge of the roof decking at the peak so that it does not obstruct the opening at the mate line. When using standard flat 3-tab shingles, caulking is not required under the flange of the ridge vent. Prior to ap- plying vent to dimensional or architectural shingles on new construction, caulk between low areas of shingle and flange of vent. Before fastening vent, make sure filter is secured between shingles and vent. When installing vent in cold weather, leave an 1/8" gap between sections to allow for warm weather expan- sion. STOP ROOF SHEATHING SHORT OF EDGE RAIL FOR VENTILATION. ALT: SHEATHING TO EXTEND TO EDGE OF TOP CHORD FILTERXREA WHEN EDGE RAIL IS LOWERED 2" _ NAIL @ EACH TRUSS CAP SHINGLES WITH 2" GALVANIZED LOW PROFILE ROOFING NAILS_ RIDGE VENT HINGE ROOF CLOSE-UP For homes with hinged roofs, complete roofing underlayment and shingles along the hinge line per the requirements listed in Appendix D. COMPLETE TRIPLE SECTION ROOFS Complete roofing along triple section home marriage lines according to one of the fol- lowing methods based on the construction of the home. Method 1: Dual ridge beams 1. Install underlayment. Fold down the underlayment of the outer section roof and apply a minimum six inch wide strip of roofing cement to the sheathing. Lay the underlayment of the outer section on top. of the cement (see Best Prac- tice tip for optional metal flashing). Then apply a minimum six inch wide strip of roofing cement to the outer section underlayment and fold down the center section roof underlayment over this cement. 2. Install shingles. Install missing row(s) of shingles, securing them per the shingle manufacturer's installation instructions (refer to the shingle wrapper). 57 Figure 27. Shingle cut into thirds Installing a ridge vent. If a ridge vent'is to be installed, follow the ridge vent manu- facturer's instructions pro- vided with the material or as an addendum to this manual in lieu of underlayment over ridge line and shingle cap. Figure 28. Ridge vent instal- lation i /, ACETOXY TYPE SILI- CONES ARE NOT TO BE USED. This type of silicone will weaken or melt asphalt shingles. The Alcoxy or Neu- tral Cure type silicones will not melt asphalt and are the proper silicones to be used in roof applications. All sea- lants used in shingle and roof applications, excluding underlayment securement, must be an Alcoxy or Neu- tral Cure type silicone OR meet the ASTM D 4586 standard. Asphalt/Asbestos based sealants, such as Black Tar, must meet the ASTM D 4586 standard. Shingle underlayment sea- lants are required in Wind Zone II and III applications and must meet the ASTM 3019 standard. CENTER SECTION OUTER SECTION Figure 29.Triple section roof connection Method 1 FACTORY -INSTALLED UNDERLAYMENT FACTORY -INSTALLED SHINGLES FIELD -INSTALLED SHINGLES J FACTORY -INSTALLED SHINGLES ASPHALT ROOFING CEMENT Installing metal \ BETWEEN LAYERS OF flashing. Install optional UNDERLAYMENT MIN 6" WIDE metal flashing over the roof decking before applying D roofing cement. Fold back a the underlayment and fas- C �D ten 30 x 6" wide mini- mum galvanized metal with roofing nails or 16 ga x 1" METAL FASTENER crown staples of sufficient (OPTIONAL) length to penetrate the roof sheathing. Space fasteners four inches o.c. or less near the edge of the metal. Overlap the metal by at least two inches at joints. Method 2: Field installed sheathing 1. Install underlayment. Fold down the underlayment of the outer section roof and fold up the underlayment on the center section roof. Apply to the lower roof underlayment a minimum six inch wide strip of roofing cement centered on the sheathing joint. Cover with the shipped loose underlayment. Apply another minimum six inch wide strip of roofing cement to the ship loose underlayment centered on the upper roof sheathing joint. 2. Install shingles. Install missing row(s) of shingles per the shingle manufactur- er's installation instructions (refer to the shingle wrapper). FACTORY INSTALLED SHINGLES Figure 30.Triple section roof FIELD INSTALLED SHINGLES connection Method 2 FIELD INSTALLED SHEATHING FIELD INSTALLED UNDERLAYMENT ASPHALT ROOFING CEMENT BETWEEN FACTORY LAYERS OF UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLED MIN. 6" WIDE UNDERLAYMENT FACTORY INSTALLED SHINGLES '--- FACTORY INSTALLED FACTORY SHEATHING INSTALLED NAILER STEP 2. COMPLETE TAG UNIT ROOF If the home has a tag unit, complete roofing for this unit now. The process for complet- ing the roof is different for flush and offset roofs. Follow the instructions in the appropri- ate section below. FLUSH ROOFS For flush roofs, complete roofing along the marriage line and at the valley line as follows (see Figure 31): 58 SHINGLE UNDERLAYMENT Figure 31. Tag unit flush INSTALL FLASHING (OR roof connection ADDITIONAL LAYER OF Pq FASTENER UNDERLAYMENT) FLAT OVER JOINT TAG MAIN UNIT UNIT - - \_ _ All Marriage line Method 1: Install metal flashing (minimum 30 ga x minimum 6" wide) over the joint between the main roof dormer and tag unit roof. Secure the flashing to the roof decks on both dormer and tag unit roofs with roofing nails or 16 ga staples with a one inch crown and long enough to fully penetrate the roof decks. Space fasteners maximum two inches o.c. near the edge of the flashing. Overlap seams in the metal by at least two inches. After flashing is complete, install shingles per shingle manu- facturer instructions and ridge cap/vent according to STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF (p. 56). Method 2: Install two layers of roofing underlayment or equivalent over the joint be- tween the main roof dormer and tag unit roof lapping the factory installed under- layment a minimum of six inches on each side and fully cemented at the laps. In- stall shingles per shingle manufacturer instructions and ridge cap/vent according to STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF (p. 56). Valley line Along the bottom of the valley, shingles and one or more layers of roll roofing may need to be installed. If fastened to the roof at the factory, unroll the roofing, overlap the tag roof and trim the roofing to the roof edge. If shipped loose, install the roll roof- ing at the valley, lapping it under the factory installed roll roofing a minimum of 12 inches and fully cement the roofing at the lap. Complete shingles at the valley either by interweaving them or by trimming back approximately four inches from the valley line and fully cementing the exposed shingle edges. Fasteners must not be installed within 6" of the centerline of the valley. OFFSET ROOFS If there is a gap between the main unit dormer overhang and the tag unit roof of less than two inches, fold up the main unit dormer fascia, slide the underlayment and flash- ing from the tag unit roof behind the fascia, and bend the fascia back down and secure into sub fascia with metal screws (Figure 32). MAIN UNIT ROOF Figure 32. Tag unit roofing FACTORY UNDERLAYMENT (SHINGLES NOT SHOWN ON connection with less than INSTALLED CARRIED UP INTO MAIN UNIT FOR CLARITY) DRIP EDGE two inch height difference FLASHING DORMER MAIN UNIT FASCIA SUB -FASCIA \ DORMER FACTORY FASCIA INSTALLED 'UNDERLAYMENT DISTANCE BETWEEN MAIN UNIT_ DORMER AND TAG UNIT ROOF MAY VARY (MIN. 4" TO MAX OF 2") TAG UNIT TRUSS - MAIN UNIT DORMER TRUSS- UNDERLAYMENT OVER ROLLED ROOFING CARRIED UP INTO DORMER SUB -FASCIA MIN. 3" 59 TAG UNIT ROOF If the gap between the main unit dormer overhang and the tag unit roof is two inches or more, bend up the inside corner trim at the dormer overhang and main unit sidewall, fold up the factory installed flashing on the tag unit roof, fold the inside corner trim back down and secure into dormer wall with metal screws (Figure 33). MAIN UNIT _ _ _ s _ - --SHINGLES Figure 33. Tag unit offset METAL FASCIA roof connection ROOF DECKING SHINGLES METAL FLASHING 3 (OR TOP COURSE ROOF OF VINYL SIDING) DECKING FASTENER TAG UNIT STEP 3. COMPLETE SIDE WALLS Siding necessary to complete the exterior has been provided with the home. Follow the siding manufacturer's instructions (found on or with the packaging or as an addendum to this manual) and to complete the exterior siding as follows: Covering the HUD label. 1. Remove shipping protection. Remove temporary shipping protection from Do not cover the HUD la - walls. bel on the exterior of the 2. Complete crossovers. Complete any crossover connections in the walls, in- home. cluding: electrical, stereo speaker, doorbell, telephone and intercom wires. Removing shipping pro- 3. Install siding. Fasten siding only at stud locations, avoiding electrical wires tection. Remove tempo - that are present in the walls. rary shipping protection 4. Fasteners. Fasteners must be installed as described in the manufacturer's in- from walls before installing stallation instructions or DAPIA approved test reports for the siding. siding or serious moisture damage may result. Wind 5. Install close-up strips. If siding has been installed on the end walls at the fac- wrap (such as Tyvek or tory, fasten close-up strips securely along both edges and seal the edges with other similar product) will a waterproof sealant. be installed over the exte- 6. Install trim. Install any matching trim required to complete the installation. rior wall OSB sheathing 7. Seal penetrations. With a waterproof sealant, seal any penetrations in the sid- and under the shipping in that may have been caused b temporary shipping plastic. Be careful not to 9 Y Y p ry Aping protection. damage the wind wrap when removing the ship- ping plastic. .E Connect Crossovers This chapter covers crossover connections between units of multi -section homes, including ducts and electrical, water, waste, gas, telephone and cable TV connections. STEP 1. CONNECT. DUCTS (p. 61) STEP 2. CONNECT ELECTRICAL CROSSOVERS',(p., 64) 'STEP, 3. INSTALL ELECTRICALBONDING (p. 67) STEP 4. CONNECT WATER LINES. (p. 67) STEP 5. CONNECT DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT LINES, (p. 69) STEP 6. CONNECT GAS LINES (p 70) STEP'7. CONNECT.TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV WIRING (p. 71) STEP 1. CONNECT DUCTS There are three main types of duct crossover connections. Based on the location of the duct, follow the installation steps on the page indicated below: • Under the floor (p. 61). • In the roof cavity (p. 62). • In floor, through -the -rim joist (p. 63) To prevent air leakage, seal all ductwork connections, including duct collars using one or more of the following materials: • Galvanized metal straps in combination with galvanized sheet metal screws. • For rigid air ducts and connectors, tape and mastics listed to UL 181A. • For flexible air ducts and connectors, tape and mastics listed to UL 181 B. UNDER FLOOR FLEXIBLE CROSSOVER DUCT When heating or cooling equipment is installed in the home, the flexible crossover duct is provided by the manufacturer. In all cases the crossover duct must be listed for exte- rior use and should be wrapped with insulation of at least R-8 under a vapor barrier with a perm rating of not greater than one. There are four common configurations of under floor crossover ducts depending on the number of home sections and the furnace/air handler location. See Table 16 to locate the appropriate figure. TA121 C 49 1 IA111C12 CI nnP r11Ir`T r r1NIFIr:11RATIr1NC Furnace location Two home sections Three home sections Furnace over trunk duct See Figure 34 See Figure 34B ,Furnace offset from trunk duct See: Figure 34A See Figure 34C FURNACE I AIR I ASECTION HANDDLLER 13SECTION I I�Da FLOOR HEAT DUCTS "i TAP -OUT COLLAR FLEX DUCT SUPPORT STRAPS FIELD -INSTALLED FLEX DUCT t ZZ Qualified personnel. Use only qualified personnel to make crossover connec- tions. Consult the LAHJ for licensing or any additional crossover connection re- quirements. Access for service. When- ever possible maintain ac- cess to connection areas for future maintenance. Make tight connections. Permanent, durable and tight crossover duct con- nections are critical to the proper performance of the home. Leaky ducts can re- sult in severe moisture problems in the home, dis- comfort from rooms not re- ceiving the proper amount of conditioned air and high utility bills from wasted heating and/or cooling en- ergy. Figure 34. Furnace over trunk duct, two home sec- tions 61 FURNACE/AIR Figure 34A. Furnace offset At SEC 'TON HANOLER BSECTION from trunk duct, two home FL R sections HEAT DUCT TAP -OUT COLLAR FLEX DUCT SUPPORT FIELD -INSTALLED FLEX STRAPS DUCT N'-BOX UNDER FURNACE FURNACE/AIR Figure 3413. Furnace over ASECTIDN HANDLER BSECTION CSECTION trunk duct, three home sec- tions HEAT DUCT TAP43UT COLLAR FIELDaNSTALLEDFLEX 'N-BOX UNDER FLEX DUCT SUPPORT DUCT STRAPS FURNACE FUAND HANDLER H Fi ure 34C. Furnace offset g ASECTION LU® BSECTION CSECnoN U from trunk duct, three home section HEAT DUCT" TAP -OUT COLLAR FIELD -INSTALLED FLEX DUCT V-BOX UNDER IN-UNEV-BOX FLEXDUCTSUPPORT STRAPS FURNACE For under floor flexible crossover ducts follow the steps below: 1. Locate collars. Locate the metal crossover collars (or V-box) connected to the main trunk duct (or furnace) under the home and remove temporary shipping protection. Securing the 2. Install inner duct. Apply mastic completely over inner liner and collarN-box. crossover. Between Step Slide the crossover duct inner liner over the crossover collar/V-box as far as it 5 and Step 6, drill three or will go. Install a large nylon zip tie over the inner liner just above the "ridge" more 1/16 inch holes an around the crossover collarN-box. Apply mastic completely over inner liner and equal distance around and collarN-box. just below the bottom edge 3. Connect duct insulation. Bring the duct insulation up over the zip tie and of the nylon zip -tie. Install above the home's bottom board into the floor cavity. Temporarily duct tape it #12 pan head screws in against the base of the trunk duct/V-box. these holes, through the 4. V-box Insulation. Verify that the V-box has been insulated with R-8 minimum. flexible duct and into the metal crossover collarN- 5. Pull duct wrap. Pull the crossover duct outer wrap over the top of the insula- box. The screw heads tion and temporarily secure it to the trunk duct/V-box with duct tape. should be against the zip- 6. Install zip tie. Feel for the nylon zip tie that was installed over the inner liner. tie. Place another nylon zip tie just under the first one to permanently secure the crossover duct insulation and outer wrap, making sure all of the insulation is in- side the outer wrap. V 7. Trim duct. Trim the crossover duct to length such that the installed duct will be 1Z straight with no kinks or unnecessary bends. Cover exposed metal. 8. Connect other end. Follow the same procedure (steps 1 through 5) to connect Completely cover all the opposite end of the crossover duct and any other crossover ducts. posed metal connectors with insulation. Apply seal- 9. Seal joints. Seal the joints between the bottom board and the crossover duct ants and tapes only to sur- with bottom board repair tape. faces that are dry and free 10. Support duct. Support the crossover duct(s) above the ground using nylon or of dust, dirt, and grease. galvanized metal straps and saddles spaced every 48 inches o.c. or less. Avoid ground contact. In - Choose straps at least 1/2 inch wider than the spacing of the metal spirals en- stalled crossover ducts casing the crossover duct. Install the straps so they cannot slip between spi- must not be in contact with rals. Secure metal straps with galvanized screws. the ground. ROOF CAVITY CROSSOVER DUCT Unobstructed airflow. Ex - For ducts installed in the roof cavity, follow the steps below: cess length, kinks and bends in the crossover 1. Access the duct. Access the crossover location through an access panel in duct will restrict airflow and the ceiling or the open sides of the home before the sections are joined and degrade the home's HVAC remove any temporary shipping protection. system performance. 2. Join ducts. Using the provided flexible duct, join the distribution boxes in each Compressed Duct. Support section of the home as shown in Figure 35, cutting off any extra duct length to the duct without compress - keep the duct as straight as possible. The duct must be joined in the center ing the insulation and re- 62 with the provided connecter. stricting airflow. 3. Fasten ducts. At each connection point between ducts and distribution boxes or connectors, secure the inner duct liner with a nylon strap, apply mastic com- pletely over the connection area, pull the duct insulation and outer liner over the connection area and secure them with a second nylon strap. 4. Reinstall panel. Reinstall and secure the access panel, if applicable. FLEX DUCT DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION BOX �•���ss�.. ;«.:ter.:•.. CEILING IN THE FLOOR CROSSOVER DUCT Where one or more crossover ducts are built into the home's floor system, connect them either through or under the rim joist depending on the design of the home. Through the rim joist With a through the rim joist design, the duct in each floor section terminates at an open- ing in the marriage line rim joist. Fixed through -the -rim crossovers employing a marriage line gasket such as in Figure 36 were completed in Complete Multi -Section Set, STEP 4. REPAIR OR INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE GASKET (p. 45) and require no additional work here. Connect other through -the -rim joist ducts using one of the following methods based on the design of the home. Method 1: Metal or Duct board through rim joist without sleeve Connect ducts that pass through the rim joist (Figure 36) as follows: 1. Align Crossover duct locations. Verify that when both halves of the home are installed that the crossover duct locations will align properly. 2. Air tight Seal. Verify that the gasket or duct board used to seal between both halves of the home is in good condition and will properly seal the duct system. 3. Connect the Units. Connect the floors using the procedure for connecting the floors (p. 45). 63 Figure 35. Duct crossover located in the roof cavity Figure 36. In -floor duct con- nection through the rim joist without metal sleeve Method 2: Duct board with sleeve Join duct board ducts with a metal sleeve as follows (Figure 37): 1. Open bottom board. On the section of the home with the furnace, cut the bot- tom board along the center line of the two floor joists on either side of the cross over duct starting at the marriage line and extending approximately three feet toward the center of the section. 2. Open duct. Create an opening in the duct by cutting the duct board as shown in Figure 37. 3. Insert sleeve. Insert the provided metal sleeve, centering it on the marriage line joint. 4. Seal duct. Close the bottom of the duct and seal it with tape specially made for that purpose (may be provided). 5. Seal floor. Replace the floor insulation to its original position and seal the bot- tom board tightly with tape specially made for that purpose. WALL MARRI GE WALL Figure 37. In -floor duct with crossover using metal FLOOR sleeve OPEN STEP 2. CONNECT ELECTRICAL CROSSOVERS Multi -section homes may have one or more electrical crossovers located in the wall(s) and/or floor(s) the line(s). i �� along marriage JOINING WIRES Use qualified electricians. Two types of connections may be present at these locations —snap connectors and All electrical work must be junction boxes. Identify matching circuits if multiple circuits exist at a single crossover lo- performed by a qualified cation. These will be coded for identification. Connect snap connectors according to the electrician and comply with connector manufacturer's installation instructions, including fastener requirements. the 2005 NEC. Connect wires in junction boxes as follows (Figure 38): Disconnect power. Turn off Pull wires. Pull circuit wires into the junction box, sliding them through a romex connec- power to the home before making connections. for and secure snugly. (Figure 38) Do not over -tighten. Proper use of GFCI cir- 1. Strip wires. Remove the outer jacket that holds the circuit wires together pro- cuits. Ensure Ground viding a minimum of four inches of free wire in the box. Fault Circuit Interrupted 2. Connect wires. Connect wires together matching like colors, using appro- (GFCI) circuits are con- priately sized wire nuts. Use the ground wire to ground the junction box and/or nected to the proper GFCI cover plate(s), if metal. Junction boxes may contain single or multiple 15 or 20 protected circuits from the amp circuits, or a single 240 volt appliance circuit. power supply. 3. Replace cover. Reposition the junction box cover and secure using machine (not sheet metal) screws. m APPROVED CONNECTORS i SINGLE 15 OR 20 AMP CIRCUIT APPROVED PLASTIC OR METAL BOX (TYPICAL) CLAMPS PER TYPE o ev�c ewc� BOX USED (TYPICAL) GROUND LUG (METAL BOXES ONLI� DOUBLE 15 OR 20 AMP CIRCUITS FLOOR CROSSOVER When making electrical connection(s) in the floor, use one of the wiring options de- scribed below: Figure 38. Types ofjunction box wiring connections CONNECTORS Method 1: Access panel 1. Access wires. Find the crossover location(s) and remove the access panel(s) if attached. If access panel openings are not provided, cut through bottom board to expose the wiring (Figure 39). 2. Route wires. Pass the wires through predrilled holes or notches in the rim joist or if there is a single bumped -out access panel as in Figure 40, then connect under the rim joists. 3. Connect wires. Connect wires via a junction box or snap-connector(s) as de- scribed above. 4. Secure wires. Secure wires with staples to adjacent joists or studs within eight inches of junction box or snap-connector(s). 5. Install smash plates. For notched perimeter joists, install steel wire protectors (smash plates). 6. Seal bottom board. Replace insulation and re -install access panels and/or seal the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose (may be pro- vided). The access panel(s) may be temporarily installed near the crossover lo- cation or shipped loose with the home. HOLE THROUGH RIM JOIST i � AGROUND LUG (METAL BOXES ONLY) 240V APPLIANCE CIRCUIT IF JOISTS ARE NOT GHEU , JUNCTION—""' UNCTION STEEL PROTECTORS MAY BE BOX OR SNAP PROVIDED WITH THE HOME CONNECTOR ACCESS PANEL MAY BE PROVIDED SNAP CONNECTOR f'f[V 1 C\i I I V C li V Cm (IF NOT PROVIDED, PATCH BOTTOM BOARD) 66 i // Using snap connectors. Do not use oversized nails or drive nail heads into snap connectors. Some connectors are designed for one-time use only — a new connector must be used if they become sepa- rated. Protect cables. Cover all cables with conduit or oth- er suitable weather - resistant and protective material. Figure 39. Electrical cros- sover floor wires with flush access panels Figure 40. Floor electrical crossover wires with bumped -out access panel Method 2: Junction box with conduit 1. Access boxes. If junction boxes are not exposed, access them inside the floor by cutting the bottom board or by removing the access panel(s). Remove the junction box covers. 2. Connect wires. If wire is coiled inside one junction box, insert it into flexible conduit and pass it under the rim joists to the opposing box and make the con- nection as described above. If no coiled wire is provided, install conduit with wire making connections in both boxes (Figure 40). 3. Cover boxes. Replace and secure covers on junction boxes. 4. Seal floor. Replace any displaced insulation and replace access panel or seal the bottom board with tape specially made for that'purpose (may be provided). Variation to Method 2: Ajunction box may be installed only on one side with the other side containing conduit behind an access panel. Bring the conduit to other side and make one connection in the junction box. JUNCTION BOX (MAY BE UNDER } OR ALONGSIDE FLOOR JOIST) -J WIRE FOR CROSSOVER FLEXIBLE CONDUIT-� MAY BE COILED INSIDE JUNCTION BOX WALL CROSSOVERS Connect electrical, phone, cable television and stereo speaker wires in marriage walls and/or partition and end walls. If access panels into the marriage walls are not provided, then the connection should have been made prior to bringing the home sections together. If access panels are provided in marriage, end or partition walls, remove the panels, join the wires as described above using the provided snap -connector, junction box or at a receptacle, and re -attach the access panel (Figure 42 for marriage walls and Figure 43 for partitions and end walls). CONNECT WIRES AT JUNCTION BOX, r-� i RECEPTACLE OR OPTIONAL i SNAP -CONNECTOR ACCESS PANEL ENDWALL ACCESS TO JUNCTION ENDWALL SIDE'A' BOX INSIDE HOME SIDE'B' FLOOR IXIXI FACTORY -INSTALLED WIRE PROTECTORS MARRIAGE Figure 41. Under the rim joist electrical crossover connection with conduit / // Avoid damaging crossov- er wires. Carefully fold marriage wall crossover wires so they stay within a single bay and are not sandwiched between studs when the sections are pulled together. Figure 42. Inside marriage wall crossover connection Figure 43. Inside partition or end wall electrical crossover connection STEP 3. INSTALL ELECTRICAL BONDING To ensure all metal parts are effectively grounded, electrically bond all chassis together as follows (Figure 44): 1. Find lugs. Determine if solderless ground lugs are provided on the front or rear frame outriggers or headers. 2. Attach wire. If lugs are provided, uncoil the bonding wire (#8 minimum bare copper wire) from one side of the home and connect it to the lug provided on the opposing side using a paint penetrating star washer, tighten the set screw firmly on the wire and repeat for any additional home sections. Torque the set screw per the manufacturer's requirements. MARRIAGE LINE FLOOR SOLDERLESS LUG EACH HALF OF HOME �REAROUTRIGGERg MIN. COPPER AT MARRIAGE LINE GROUND WIRE 3. Attach strap. If ground lugs and copper wire are not provided, attach the pro- vided four inch bonding strap to each pair of adjacent chasses with two #8 x 3/4" self -tapping metal screws (one screw each side). STEP 4. CONNECT WATER LINES Connect water lines inside the floor through access panels or below the bottom board as follows: WATER LINES ACCESSED THROUGH PANELS 1. Remove panels. Remove access panels from each home section. 2. Remove caps. Remove shipping caps from ends of water lines, if present. 3. Pull lines. Pull water lines through holes in rim joist or attach shipped loose flex connectors, if applicable (Figure 45). 4. Connect pipes. Connect threaded water lines using flexible pipe or a rigid connector line (if provided) and connector fittings (do not use lubricants or sea- lants). 5. Test. Test connections for leaks. 6. Seal floor. Securely replace insulation and access panels. Figure 44. Electrical bond- ing of multi -section homes V&*IrZZA Applying cement. Follow cement manufacturer's in- structions with respect to application and drying time. Allow cement to fully cure before filling pipes with water. Figure 45. Waterline cros- sover with access panels V&POZZA Choosing cement type. Use the proper cement for water lines as it may differ from the cement used for the DWV system. 67 WATER LINES DROPPED BELOW BOTTOM BOARD 1. Remove caps. Remove protective shipping caps from ends of pipes and make sure pipe ends are clean and smooth. 2. Connect pipes. Connect threaded water lines using flexible pipe or a rigid connector line (if provided) and connector fittings (do not use lubricants or sealants) (Figure 46). 3. Test. Test connections for leaks. 4. Protect pipes. Wrap water lines with insulation and bottom board shipped loose with home or otherwise protect to prevent freezing. Tape bottom board using tape specially made for that purpose (may be provided) and staple with 7/16" x 1/2" staples at four inches o.c. around bottom board using a divergent (stitch) stapler or equivalent. Generally, only insulation is necessary to protect water supply lines from freezing when the home is skirted. Some homeowners may desire to protect their water supply lines with a heat tape. This tape must be approved for manufactured home use by a nationally recognized testing agency and be installed in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. An electrical outlet has been provided under the home for the heat tape. This out- let is protected by a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter and should not be used for any other purpose. SUPPLY SIDE (SIDE I MARRIAGE LINE WITH WATER HEATER) i RECEIVING SIDE Figure 46. Waterline cross- over through bottom board WATER LINE ,/-WATER LINE CAP TO BE�� PROTECTIVE REMOVED CAP ON -SITE DIRECTION OF FLOW -► WATER LINE AND ELBOWS SHIPPED LOOSE TO BE ADDED ON SITE STEP 5. CONNECT DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT LINES Complete portions of the drain, waste and vent (DWV) system that are below the floor as follows: 1. Remove caps. Remove shipping covers from pipes extending through the bot- tom board; inspect pipes and fittings and clean them of dirt, obstructions and burrs. 2. Assemble pipes. Using the drain schematic drawing provided with the home, begin assembling the DWV system starting at the location farthest from the sewer/septic connection and working towards the outlet, fastening the pipe with cement or adjustable screw -clamp connectors, if provided (Figure 47). As the system is assembled, support the piping with temporary blocking. Unless oth- erwise noted on the schematic diagram, provide a minimum 1/4 inch per foot slope towards the sewer/septic using a plumber's level. Where a slope of 1/4 inch per foot cannot be maintained, use a minimum slope of 1/8 inch per foot and install of a full-size clean -out at the uppermost point of the run (Figure 48). CEMENT COUPLING (PROVIDED) TO END OF PIPES DRAIN PIPE FASTEN COUPLING (PROVIDED) TO PIPING WITH CLAMPS o 0 0 FLOOR I%IYI FLOOR SUPPORT STRAPS dt— —NO— DIRECTION DIRECTION OF FLOW OF FLOW COUPLING CONNECTION PIPE COUPLER T Zf Providing required clear- ances. Provide the drain outlet with a minimum clearance of three inches in any direction from all parts of the structure or any appurtenances and with not less than 18 inch- es unrestricted clearance directly in front of the drain outlet. Provide any cleanouts with a minimum clearance of 12 inches di- rectly in front of its open- ing. Figure 47. Drain crossover connection Figure 48. DIM/ system FLOOR DRAIN DROPOUT DRAIN DROPOUT DRAIN DROPOUT DUST COVER PIPE DUST COVER SLOPE DUST COVER SUPPORTS--� LONG TURN ELL SLOPE II II SLOPE LONG TURN Y --DOUBLE ELL SANITARY ELL TO SEWER TEE / SEPTIC WYE LONG TURN TEE WYE_ &,CLEAN -OUT (SUBSTITUTE FOR ELBOW PLUG AND PROVIDE A FULL SIZE CLEAN OUT WHEN REQUIRED) LONG TURN ELL 3. Test. After all drain lines have been connected, conduct a two-part leakage test on the completed drainage system as follows: • Part 1. With all fixtures connected, and all tub and shower drains plugged, fill the system with water to the rim of the toilet bowl through a higher fix- ture. Release all trapped air, replace tub and shower plugs, backfill fix- tures, and allow the system to stand at least 15 minutes. Check for leaks. Drain the system. If leaks are found, repair and retest. • Part 2. Plug all fixtures, sinks, showers, and tubs and fill with water. Re- lease the water in all fixtures simultaneously to obtain the maximum possi- ble drain piping flow. As water is draining, check for leaks. If any are found, repair and retest. 4. Connect to outlet. Connect the main drain line to the site sewer/septic hook- up, using an approved elastomer coupling or by other methods acceptable to the LAHJ (Figure 49). i Z/ Choosing glues. Use only solvents and glues com- patible with the pipe (ABS or PVC). Follow manufac- turer's instructions. •o, EXAMPLES OF :2 CONNECTION PIPE AND FITTINGS (NOT SUPPLIED BY THE MANUFACTURER) FLOW SUPPORT STRAP AT A MAX. OF 4 FEET ON CENTER CAP AND CHAIN APPROVED COUPLER. SITE SEWER HOOKUP Install supports. Install permanent drain line supports at a distance of four feet o.c. or less (see Figure 50). Alternate DWV pipe support may be used if ap- proved by the local authority having jurisdiction. DRAIN PIPING SUPPORTS DRAIN PIPING SUPPORTS INSIDE OF MAIN BEAM OUTSIDE OF MAIN BEAM 1 1 CROSSMEMBER FLOOR RIM RAIL TYPICAL 1 t FLOOR JOIST (TYP) �2 BOTTOM BOTTOM BOARD 4, PLUMBERS TAPE, �' BOARD PLUMBERS DRAIN PIPE WITH PLASTIC STRAPPING '' CC TAPE, PLASTIC MINIMUM 1/4" SLOPE OR OTHER SUITABLE STRAPPING OR OTHER MAIN BEAM MATERIAL (T YP) MINIMUM 1x3 SUITABLE MATERIAL TREATED OR FASTENED TO FLOOR DRAIN PIPE WEATHER- JOIST THROUGH BOTTOM WITH MAX. SEALED BOARD (TYPICAL) 1/4" SLOPE LUMBER PROCEDURE: 1)ADD MINIMUM 1x3 LUMBER BETWEEN FRAME CROSSMEMBERS DIRECTLYABOVE DRAIN PIPING BY PUSHING UP ON THE BOTTOM BOARD AND RESTING THE LUMBER ON TOP OR INSIDE OF THE CROSSMEMBER LEG AS SHOWN. 2) WRAP SUPPORT STRAPPING AROUND PIPING AND 1x FRAMING MATERIAL FASTEN STRAPPING TO SUPPORT AS SHOWN BELOW. 3) OTHER METHODS TO PROVIDE SUPPORT MAY BE USED TO MAINTAIN MIN. PIPE SLOPE REQUIREMENTS WITH THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 4) LUMBER MATERIAL TO BE PROTECTED FROM MOISTURE. CAUTION ELECTRICAL WIRING MAY BE SECURED TO WIDE FACE OF FLOOR JOISTS THAT ARE OUTSIDE OF THE MAIN BEAM. MAKE SURE FASTENERS SECURING STRAPPING PENETRATE BOTTOM EDGE OF JOISTS TO ELIMINATE POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHORTS. STRAPPING MAY ALSO BE FLOOR DECKING INSTALLED DIRECTLY TO THE STEEL CHASSIS WITH t-2 x 6 FLOOR JOIST SELF -TAPPING SCREWS. FLOOR DECKING WHEN PIPE RUNS BETWEEN JOISTS ADD 1 x 3 W/ (2) 711 6"x 2-1/2" x 16 GA STAPLES OR (2) .131 x 3" NAILS T(�2) 2 x 6 FLOOR EACH END (MAY BE TOE -NAILED) JOIST (TYP.) 2 x 3OR2x4W/(2)7/16"x '77 7/16" x 1 1/4' x 16 2-10 x 16 GA. STAPLES G. STAPLES OR (2) OR (2j .131 x 3' NAILS .131 x 3' NAILS AT EACH END OF STRAP SUPPORT STRAPS @ 48" O/C MAX ATTACHED W/ (2) 7/16' STEEL STRAPS x 1-1/4" x 16 GA. STAPLES OR AT 48" O/C MAX .131 x Y NAILS AT EACH END ALTERNATE OF STRAP ADD ADOTIONAL STRAP WITHIN 12' ADD ADOTIONAL BLOCK WITHIN 24" OF WHERE PIPE TURNS VERTICAL. OF WHERE PIPE TURNS VERTICAL. 6. Insulate. Replace all insulation and repair any tears or openings in bottom board. Figure 49. DWV connection to sewer/septic Figure 60. DWV pipe sup- port options Protect pipes from freez- ing. If the home is to be left unheated in cold weather, pour antifreeze solution into all drain traps, including sinks, tubs and toilets. Be sure that the an- tifreeze is safe for the fix- tures and P-traps. Installing quick discon- nect fittings. Do not use tools, lubricants or sealants with quick disconnect fit- tings. Gas test precautions. Do not connect to gas service until tests described in Connect Utilities have been successfully com- pleted. 70 STEP 6. CONNECT GAS LINES The gas crossover connection may use quick disconnect fittings or threaded connectors. Find the connection location below the floor at the marriage line and gather the connec- tors (they may be shipped loose if not present under the home). For quick disconnect fittings (Figure 51), remove any dust caps and then with.one hand, pull back on the quick disconnect device, snap it over the quick disconnect adaptor and release it to complete the connection. For threaded connectors, remove the black cap and nipple (or any other plugs, such as a black iron plug) from both the supply and receiving sides and screw the connector onto the supply and return pipes as necessary. Check for leaks before connecting to gas service (see Connect Utilities, STEP 3. CONNECT GAS SERVICE, p. 100). SHUT-OFF VALVE INSTALLED ON FLEX INLET SIDE CONNECTOR FACTORY INSTALLED OR FEMALE CAP CAP DIRECTION OF GAS FLOW STEP 7. CONNECT TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV WIRING Install telephone and cable television wiring in accordance with the requirements of the LAHJ, the NEC and NFPA No.70-2005. When making crossover connections or instal- ling telephone or cable television wires, do not run them in the same raceway as, or in close proximity to, high voltage electrical conductors or cables. Wires should only be installed by trained professionals. 71 Figure 51. Gas crossover connection V&VJqZ_ZA Gas Crossover. A quick disconnect may be installed on the gas line crossover, but it may not replace the shut-off valve. A shut-off valve is required on the inlet side of the gas line crossov- er. V&Azzld Installing wiring. When in- stalling telephone and ca- ble television wires, do not damage electrical wires, plumbing lines or ducts. Serious personal injury or death could result from damage to electrical wires. Complete the Interior This chapter covers the completion of the home's interior finishes including finishing walls, ceilings, flooring, trim and mis- cellaneous items. STEP 1. ALIGN MARRIAGE WALLS Align and secure walls at marriage line openings.as follows: 1. Align walls. Align walls and clamp in place. 2. Fasten walls. Secure walls together when necessary. 3. Fill gaps. Fill any remaining gaps over 1 inch with wood or sheathing materi- al. STEP 2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD Finish all unfinished gypsum board walls and ceilings as follows: 1. Install panels. Install ship loose gypsum panels using a 1/4 inch diameter bead of polyvinyl acetate (PVA) adhesive on all framing members and mini- mum 1-1/2 inch long drywall screws, nails or staples at six inches o.c. along panel edges and 12 inches o.c. in the field into framing members. Adhesive is not required when installing gypsum pieces used for trim or close-up materi- als. 2. Mud seams. Mud and tape all seams and corners, filling all fastener depres- sions. Follow mud manufacturer's directions. 3. Paint. When the final coat of mud is dry, sand, prime and paint all unfinished gypsum board to match existing paint color and finish texture. STEP 3. COMPLETE CARPET Install and seam ship loose or rolled carpet as follows: 1. Prepare floor. Clean the floor of all dirt and debris and smooth the floor deck at the marriage line seams as necessary to ensure a level and smooth sur- face. 2. Lay pad. Lay down the carpet pad, if provided. Seal seams with pad tape. Staple pad to floor about 6 inches from the seam. 3. Preparing carpet for cutting. Do not release stay nails. Let the carpet sec- tions overlap. Using NON STAINING CHALK, snap a line on the top edge across the length of the seam. Make sure the line overlaps both sides of the ' // Fastening gypsum. When attaching gypsum board, depress, but do not break the paper face with the fas- tener. Breaking the paper will weaken the connection. Using alternative materials. Obtain the home manufac- turer's approval before us- ing interior finish materials other than those provided with the home. /// Installing carpet. Only ex- perienced carpet installers should install carpet. Fail- ure to follow the carpet manufacturer's directions may void the carpet war- ranty. 72 tions overlap. Using NON STAINING CHALK, snap a line on the top edge may void the carpet war - across the length of the seam. Make sure the line overlaps both sides of the ranty. 4. carpet. Making the guide cuts. Make 1 inch long cuts through BOTH pieces of car- pet every 2 feet. 5. Making the seam cut. Flip the carpet edges face down. Place a straight edge on the backing lined up with the guide cuts. Cut the carpet along this line. Re- peat for each piece of carpet. Stager all seams. For ex- 6. Sealing the seam. Using liquid latex carpet sealer or specifically designed hot ample, locate the carpet pad seam three inches to glue sticks (for carpet sealing) apply a thin bead of the sealer to the raw edges left of marriage line and the of both sides of the carpet. Carpet seam sealers contain an ultraviolet marker carpet seam three inches to that glows when exposed to a blacklight. right of marriage line. 7. Starting the seam. Set the seaming iron to 2 or 3. Center the seaming tape under the pieces of carpet. Place the iron on the seaming tape. Leave it in place until the adhesive softens. When the adhesive has softened the iron will slide easily, but there will be no smoke. // 8. Completing the seam. Slide the iron until its back edge slightly overlaps the • place where its front edge was. Press the edges of the carpet together in the Carpet Manufacturers will not softened adhesive. Roll the Seam Tractor over the section to further press the warranty their product if backing into the adhesive. The Seam Tractor should be of the solid roller type, carpet seam sealer is not as a Star Wheeled Tractor can damage the hot carpet fibers. Place the NOW used at the seam. HEAT -CONDUCTIVE (plastic or wood) weight over the completed seam. Check the next section of the seaming tape to see that it has softened. If so, repeat this step until all seams have been completed. Continue moving the weight as you move. 9. Blending the seam. Roll the seam tractor slightly across the seam to blend the carpet fibers. Carpet should be cool before tractoring. 10. Keep scraps. Retain reasonable size carpet scraps to protect carpet and flooring during move -in. STEP 4. COMPLETE TRIM Using fine gauge wire staples or pin nails install ship loose molding and wainscot pane- ling to finish trimming out ceilings, marriage line walls, front and rear end walls and passageway doors where necessary. STEP 5. INSTALL SHIP LOOSE ITEMS Remove all strapping, blocking and packaging from appliances, windows and doors. Install any drapes, mini -blinds, mirrors, door stops, closet shelves and hardware per the product manufacturer's installation instructions. 73 Install Stabilizing Systems This chapter covers the design and installation of the stabilizing system which secures the home against lateral and up- ward forces caused by wind. The system covered here uses earth (or ground) anchors and steel straps connected to the home's longitudinal steel beams and/or exterior walls. Stabilizer plates may also be used to prevent the anchor head from moving laterally in the ground. An anchor, strap and stabilizer plate (if used) together are referred to as a tie down. i Vy STEP 1°: DETERMINE ANGHOR,LOCATIONS (p.'74) STEP 6.rTIGHTEN`AND,ADJUST STRAPS STEP 1. DETERMINE ANCHOR LOCATIONS Create a sketch of the home plan showing the exterior walls, marriage line(s) (if any) and frame I -beams (this will be similar to the base sketch created in Install Footings page 20). See Table 17 for a list of anchor locations, types and where they are required. Page numbers where the requirements are provided are noted in the last column. As each anchor location is determined, mark it on the sketch, noting important dimen- sions such as spacing between anchors. When complete, this will be the home's tie down plan Figure 52 and Figure 53. TABLE 17. ANCHOR LOCATION TYPES Location .Type' Wind Zone F , Wind'Zones III- See page° andlll , Frame Yes Yes 75 Sidewall Vertical No Yes 87 " Frame Yesk ,Yes 87 Longitudinal Vertical � Noa a ° No � Marriage line Vertical No Yes 89 Yeses 89 Tag Umt ! - Vertical . No n Yes x �a Porch Post Vertical Yes Yes 89 offset Unit Yesk Yes 89 Install marriage line.anchors prior to moving the home over the top of the anchor locations and then return to Set the Home or Complete Multi Section Set respectively. vlzbo/z Need for a stabilizing sys- tem. The home must be se- cured against the wind by the use of an anchor as- sembly or an alternative foundation system. Where site or other conditions pro- hibit the use of the manufac- turer's instructions, a regis- tered engineer or registered architect must design the stabilizing system. Alternate foundation designs must be approved by the manufac- tururer and DAPIA. Refer to page 8 for directions for ob- taining available approved desgns. 74 Figure 52 and Figure 53 illustrate typical anchor locations for a double section home in Wind Zone I and Wind Zones II and III respectively. Flood and seismic forces. NEAR BEAM TIEDOWN AREA L The stabilizing system re- quirements in this chapter do not consider flood or seismic loads and are not intended for use in flood or seismic hazard areas. In those areas a registered MULTI -SECTION engineer or registered archi- FLOOR SHOWN tect must design the stabiliz- ~SEPARATED ing system. Alternate foun- FOR CLARITY dation designs must be ap- I I I I proved by the manufac- tururer and DAPIA. I Figure 52. Typical anchor NEAR AND FAR BEAM TIEDOWN AREA cations for a double section home in WInd Zone 1 FRAME TIEDOWNS MAY BE SECURED TO BOTH NEAR AND FAR BEAMS (WIND ZONE 1 ONLY) OR EITHER NEAR OR FAR BEAMS (WIND ZONE 2 AND 3) AS REQUIRED BY TABLES 18, 19 AND 20. NEAR BEAM TIEDOWN AREA LARGE OPENING 48" OR MORE Figure 53. Typical anchor lo- cations for a double section home in Wind Zones 11 or 111 I -BEAM LARGE OPENING LARGE OPENING DOUBLE WIDE COLUMN VERTICAL 0 FLOOR SHOWN TIEDOWN p��p SEPARATED FOR CLARITY SMALL OPENING I I -BEAM NEAR BEAM l FAR BEAM TIEDOWN AREA I NEAR BEAM ,_ -'rEDOWN AREA TIEDOWN AREA SYMBOLLEGEND p = STANDARD SIDEWALL MARRIAGEWALL FRAME VERTICAL TIEDOWN TIEDOWN m = LONGITUDINAL TIEDOWN GS= SIDEWALL FRAME TIEDOWN SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHORS Use Tables 18,19 and 20 to determine the spacing between anchors for Wind Zones I, '"' / /, II and III, respectively. Spacing requirements will vary depending on the type of home (single or multi -section), the slope of the roof, the width of the floor for each section, the Maximum spacing require- sidewall height, I-beam spacing and the height from the ground to the strap attachment The LAHmay have point. Determine the values for the home. Using the table for the appropriate wind zone, quirements anchor spacing requirements anchor a determine the column and row that corresponds to the characteristics of the home. The that supersede the values value on the tables is the maximum distance between anchors. Keep in mind that provided in this manual. sidewall frame tie downs must be located no more than two feet from each end of home. 75 FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING ° Wind Zone 1° Tiedown.S acin Table 18 Single Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. 78 Tabie 18a 'Multi Section:Roof Pitch 4 36/12 Max 78 Table 18b Tr ile Secton Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. 79 _ Wind Zone +Tiedown`S acin = Hi h'Piich Truss Table 18c Multi Section Roof Pitch 5/12 Max. 79 Table 18d Triple Section Roof Pitch 5/12 Max _ _ 80 Table 18e _ Multi Section Roof Pitch 6/12 Max. 80 Table 18f Triple Section Roof Pitch 6/12 Max 80 Table 189 Multi Section Roof Pitch 7/12 Max 81 arable 8hs . • Triple Section Roof Pitch Max— x 81_; _ Wind Zone 2 Near l-Beam Teedown S aan Table 19. Single Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. 82 Table "19a , ` ;Multi Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12,Max. u ° _ `. Wind Zone 2�Far'I-Beam TedoviinS` aan Table 19b Single Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. 83 Lable 196 Multi Section�Roof Pitch-4.36L12 Max'" 83 Vlfind Zone Ne4'1-Beam Tiedown S "acin =°Hi h Pitch Truss.' Table 19d Multi Section Roof Pitch 5/12 Max. " 84 ..° Wind Zone 2 Far -'Beam Tied'own S acm =`Hi h Pitch Truss ' Table 19e Multi Section Roof Pitch 5/12 Max. 84 Table 19fa Multi Section Roof Pitch 6/12 Max `g4 ��u;""' Table 19g Multi Section Roof Pitch 7/12 Max. 85 Wind Zone 3 Near -Beam Ted'ovirn S acin Table 2 0 Single Section Pitch 4.36/12 Max. 85 able 20a _ MultiSection,Roof•Pitch 4.36/12 Ma4.,_ ,85 Wind Z6nec3 Far GBearii'Tiedown Sj aan Table_20b Single Section Roof Pitch 4.36112 Max. 86 .'Table 20c . Multi'SectionRoof Pitch 4.36/12 Max m 86 . TIEDOWN LIMITATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS • Anchors shall be certified for site conditions including soil type for design capacity of 3150 lbs. with resistant pull load ap- plied at a minimum 30 degree angle from horizontal. • Anchors may be inset from the edge of the sidewall 6" maximum for a near beam set and 10" minimum for a far beam set. • The floor widths listed in the following charts include the following ranges of widths: • 10 Wide = 120" • 12 Wide = 136" —144" • 14 Wide = 156" —168" • 16 Wide = 180" —190" • 18 Wide = 204" — 210" • 20 Wide = 120" • 24 Wide = 136" —144" • 28 Wide = 156" —168" • 32 Wide = 178" —186" • The maximum overhang allowed for a single section is 6" and the maximum overhang allowed for a multi section is 24". • The following frame tiedown charts list the maximum floor height measured from the top of the grade to the connection point of the tiedown strap to the I-beam. Cross reference the maximum allowable pier height (Table 9 and Table 12) with maximum allowable floor height listed in the frame tiedown charts. If maximum height listed in frame tiedown charts is ex- ceeded, then designs must be provided by a registered professional engineer or registered architect. • Contact the manufacturer if the home you are attempting to set has a floor width, I-beam spacing, wall height or roof pitch that is not shown in any of the following charts (or listed as NA). • The " * " listed after any tiedown spacing signifies that a 60 degree angle has been exceeded and an additional strap must be added to the far beam. • Ground anchors must not be spaced closer than the minimum spacing permitted by the listing or certification. Verify that sidewall vertical tiedown bracket spacing meets the requirements for Wind Zone 2 & 3 homes. Bracket spacing may be in- creased or additional brackets may be added as required. 76 Figures 54 F- NEAR I -BEAM — —FAR I -BEAM w 6" MAX INSET = Ix FOR NEAR NEAR BEAM __= FAR BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN 0 BEAM TIEDOWN FRAME INSTALLED WHEN NEAR BEAM O 10" MIN INSET TIEDOWN TIEDOWN EXCEEDS 60° LL FOR FAR BEAM 60� TIEDOWN-I—r-=� MAX_ X--GROUND LEVEL STABILIZER PLATE GROUND ANCHOR Wind Zone 1 Frame Tiedown: When the angle of the near beam frame tiedown strap exceeds 60 degrees the far beam frame tiedown strap is installed in addition to the near beam strap. ;vo i! SIDEWALL VERTICAL TIEDOWN- W c7 6" MAX INSET = FOR NEAR BEAM TIEDOWN O10" MIN INSET a FOR FAR BEAM TIEDOWN - M — LFLOOR �'Al rt '.F;;.. TO ANCHOR STRAP AND BUCKLE NOT PROVIDED FLOOR :;_;`�ti i ��arcJ•` < < d NEAR 1-BEAM --FAR I -BEAM f'%r, ; •t(���� 1il;lssst!t5�• -NEAR BEAM FAR BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN INSTALLED IN PLACE OF NEAR FRAME, FRAME BEAM TIEDOWN WHEN NEAR BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN TIEDOWN EXCEEDS 600. FAR BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN WILL NOT BE INSTALLED IN ADDITION TO THE NEAR BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN. :R PLATE ANCHOR *FLOOR JOIST AND I -BEAM SHOWN INVERTED' EDGE OF EDGE OF MAIN [-BEAM MAIN I -BEAM GROUND LEVEL NOTE: WHEN THE HOME IS INSTALLED SO THAT THE FRAME TIEDOWN WILL BE CONNECTED TO THE FARTHEST I -BEAM AS SHOWN ABOVE, A 5/16" X 21/2" (MIN) FULLY THREADED LAG SCREW MUST BE INSTALLED ON THE INSIDE FLANGE OF THIS BEAM ON EACH JOIST WHICH HAS A LAG INSTALLED ON THE OUTSIDE FLANGE (SEE DETAIL BELOW). O O � OPTION #1 OPTION #2 OPTION #3 OPTION #4 OPTION #5 BEAM SECURED TO FLOOR OPTION 1: 3/32" X 1" X 1/2" LAG CLIP (MAY BE FLAT OR OFFSET) JOIST WITH ONE OF THE JOIST OPTION 2: 2" X 13GA. ROUND FLAT WASHER WITH OPTION 3: 13GA. 3" X 2 3/8" (MIN) SLOTTED LAG CLIP OPTIONS LISTED OR WI LAG SCREW THROUGH 3/8" OPTION 4: 11GA. 3" X 2" (MIN) SLOTTED LAG CLIP HOLE IN I -BEAM FLANGE. OPTION 5: 11GA. 2 3/4" X 1 1/2" (MIN) SELF -ALIGNING SLOTTED LAG CLIP Wind Zone 2 and 3 Near I -Beam and Far I -Beam Frame Tiedown When the angle of the near beam frame tiedown strap exceeds 60 degrees the tiedown strap must be installed to the far beam frame. 77 ` "TABLE 18: SINGLE SECTION-WIND4ZONE 1,FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (FT) - MAX. ROOF Pitt �18 Max. Max =.' . 10 ft Max. Width 12 ft Max. Width " . ' ° 14It Max. Width 16 ft Max Width " ft Max. Width" Wall ;°' " JFloor 1-Beam Spacing I-Bea"m Spacing . - I -Beam Spacing - _ 1-Beam Spacing ; I Beam Spacing Height a Height 95.5* . 99.5*," 95.5'* . 99 5"" 9 95 5"� - 99 5' a� 112 , ;` " 95.5" 99.5 ,, 112 "; 99.5 , " 25" 6'-0" 4 -0" 12'-6" 11'-0"* 12 -0" 12 -0' 12 -0' 12'-0' 12'-0" 12'4" ;_ 12'-0" 6' 0"= ` ,"11 8"* 11 Oar*: . 8�-4��* 120" , 12'-0" " 12, 0"" 12'-0"° ,. 67" NA NA NA NA 6'-0"* 5'-6"* 4'-0"* 8'-4"* 8'-0"* 6'-8"* 9'-8" NA :NA1 " ° NA = ", ,.5 0��*.° " 4 8"* `k NA ,' T 0"* 6'_ =8 * �5,. 8 * ° ,_ 8'787 25" 5'-0"* NA 10'-9"* 9'-5"* 6'-4" 12'-0" 12'-0"* 12'-0" 12'-0" 12.0" 12'-0' 8ft 48 -' `, NA. `� NA°• 6'-0.'"* • " 5'-4"* , 10' 0"' 9'=4" " 7. -0"* 12.'-0" PA 67 NA NA NA N 5'-0"* 5'-0"* NA 7'-4"* 7'-0"* 6'-011* 8'-8" 80 NA ° NA,€ NA NA"." 4 6'*u 4� 6"* NA`:, 6'-4"* 25" 4 4"* NA 9-01* 8'-0 * 7 0' 12 0" 12'-0"* 12'-0" 1240* 12 0' 9ft` 48 NA :., " NAF 5 4"* 4,`6 8 8"* -. 81011 *r ' •' 6'=0" 67 NA NA NA NA 4'-8"* 4'-4"* NA 6'-8"* 6'-4"* 5'-4"* 7'-8" 4 0 .4 0"* , , ,"NA'r _5'_8"*" 5 8' * _ 4'=8 T :4a 25' NA NA 8 -0"* T-0 * 814. 11 0" 11 4"* 11-0" 11'-4 12 0 9 -6" 10ft . " ,' 48 '," =° NA n NA ' 4 8":*, 4° 0 * ` ' ` 7! 6 * ? 7 0'* 5 4'. n, 10 -6° 10' 0 " ' ° ,8'-8" 67" NA NA NA NA 4'-4"* 4'-0"* NA 6 0"* 5'-81.* " 5'-011* 7'-0" NA NA:.- `' NA,, NA.. .' NA � , ��` NA-, NA 4' 6 *" 6 S"a ' * TABLE18a MULTI SECTION WIND ,ZONE i FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (FT) MAX:,ROOF PITCH 4 36/12 r Max Max 20 ft Max Width 24 ft Max Width 28 ft Max Width 32 ft Mix.,Width; -I-Beam Wall Floor Spacing I -Beam Spacing x � Beam in I Beam Spacing Spa Height �H'eight 199 -� 79.5" _ 95.5" 99 5" , ° 79 5"=` f 'soS."Sl 99:5" ` u 112' �=°95 5 5'` ' 312' 5 5 25 12 0"* 12'0"* 12'-0" 12 0 12-0'* 12 0" 12'-0 12 0" 12 0" a ,.7ft �`48 �. 12 0"* - �' 12'0'*". *.-a 12 0 12.0" -: 67" 9' 4"* 9' 6"* 9'-0"* 9' 6"* g _g s 9 0' 9' 6 9 0,. 9' 4" = A 4* 25 12 0'* 12'-0'* 12'-0' 12 0 * 12'-0"* 12 0" 12-0 124' 12 0" 8 ft . : 1,'=0 *' ` " 12' 0"*' 12 0'* 12 -0"* , 12 0'* `� t12'�'i2!-0'!*67 8 6* 8'-6"* 9 8"* 8 4'* 8'8"* 8 0* 8 * ' 08' 6"* `a 8 6"*� : e� 8' 4"* " 0"*8 25" 12'-0"* 12'-0"* 12'-0" 12'-01* 12'-0"* 12'-0"* 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" , 9 ft,: 48 `°•„° 12'�0'* ° , . 12' 0"s, 12 0 * '� §; 12'='0"* '_ "12 0'* - 12' 0 * 12 T-0 * 8 -8"* 8 -4"* 7'-8"* 9 -4"* 9'-0' * 10 0"* 10'-0"* g12 * * * 0 2'-0 * 12 0" 12 -0" 12'-0" 12 0"* 12'-0" 12 0 12'-0*° 10�ft �� �* 162°' 0 * °; 12 0'*` a t2 0"*. 12 0*" 12 67 * 4* 7 8"* T 6* 7 0"* 86 * g q, * g 4 910* 80 i u* .6-0, - is * b 5 8 i ■ = 7 0' b 6' 6 * 6.=4"* `'7 3 ••IIfi1.•- The " * " listed after anv tiedown spacing signifies that a 60 degree angle has been exceeded and an additional strap must be added to the far beam 78 TABLE 18b. MULTI SECTION -WIND ZONE 1 FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (Ft) -MAX. ROOF PITCH 4.36/12. Max. Wall Height Max. Floor - . Height ,: 36 ft Max, Width' 1-Beam Spacing 1_ ,95.5"-99.5" �„ '4 42 ft Max, Width Spacing ,; 95.5. 48 ft Max. Width I -Beam Spacing•` 25" 12'-0"* 12'-0" 12'-0" 481112 -0,!'* 32 7 ft 67 9 4'* 9 0' * 9'-011* 25" 12'-0" * 12'-0" 12'-0" 48" 12'-0"* _ . 12'-0"* ` 8 ft 67" 8'-4" * 8'-0"* 7'-S"* _ 25 12'-0"* 12'-0" 12-0 48 ''., .12 p��* "•. `' r �12' 0'*� 12'-0" 67" 7'-6"* 7 4 * 7 4 25" 12'-0"* 12'4"* 12'-0" 48"' ' •'' : "12' 0"* .., "; "12 0"* 12'-0" 10ft 67" 6'-8"* 6'-8"* 6'-8"* 801,_ _.': 6'-8"* _ `. .. 6�,8��* 6-8 :TABLE 18c. M ILTI`SECTION -'WIND ZONE I FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING.(FT) - MAX. ROOF PITCH 5/12' Max. :Wall Height Max. Floor, Height ' ` 20.ft Max. Width I -Beam Spacing � 79 5, , , 95:5"-99.5" „ 24ft Max. Width �I-Beam Spacing 79 5"�� 95;5' 99.5" _, 312"� . "28,ft Max. Width I Beam Spacing .,, 95-5, 99,5" , ' 112" 32 ft Max. Width " I=Beam Spacing 95.5 99.5" 'Y12" . 25" 12'-0"* 12'-011* 11'-0" 12'-0"* 12'-0"* 10'-4" 8'-0" 11'-8" 11'-4" -8"* _ ", x 10' 0"* „ .�� , 11 6 *' `11-W* ! 10'-8"* 11 8'* 11=8"* 8 4" 12 -,6, 13 ft 67" 5'-8"* 5 -0"* 6'-0"* 5'-8"* 5'-6"* 6,-4"* 6'-0"* 6'-6"* 6 -6 * 80" .. 5.0„* . 4 `6'*' 4'_8 ,* 5 8 *, 5'43* .. 25" 11'-4"* 12'-0"* 10'-0" 11'-0"* 12'-0"* 9'-0" 7'-4" 10'-6" 10'-0" :.- 48" 9'4'4e 9i_0 i* 10'---4"* 10t01* 9' 8"* _ 10 -8" . 10'-6"* T-6" 10'-8"* 9 ft 67" 5'-4"* 4'-8"* 5'-8"* 5'-6"* 5'-0"* 5'-8"* 5'-8"* 6'-0"* 6'-0"* 80, 4 ,S i*'.. , 4'-0"* r5`O rs 4'-8"*, , .: 4'r6"* 5' 4"*: 5'. 0"* 5'-8"* 5'_6"*. 25" 9'-011* 11'-011* 9'-0" 9'-01,* 9'-81.* 8'4' 6'-8" 9'-8" 9'4' 10ft 48 ; ;. �; < 8' 8'i* g!! 4,'* ' .; 9 6"*T, 9' 0 w ° ` 8' 8"* 9.' 4 * -• 9' 6"* 6 8 101_011* 67" 5'-0"* 4'-6"* 5'-4"* 5'-01.* 4' 8"* 5'-6"* 5'-4"* 5'-8"* . 80 ` 4 4 .'�� 4' 0" 4 8"�,` �, . i4' 6, . 4 0 S 0 * - -4'-8* AGIUCU U�R�L' ` r t1�f� OF TES 7�///11111110 The " * " listed after any tiedown spacinq signifies that a 60 degree angle has been exceeded and an additional strap must be added to the far beam. 79 TABLE 18d. MULTI SECTION - WIND ZONE 1 FRAME'TIEDOWN SPACING (FT) - MAX. ROOF PITCH 5/12, Max. Max. 36 ft Max. Width W 42 ft Max. Width 48 ft Max. Width Wall Floor :• I -Beam Spacing „' 1-Beam Spacing I-Beam,Spacing Height Height °95 5"=99.5"'-95 5'-99.5' •; 25' 12'-0"* 10'-0.. 11'-6 8ft, 48 1270'*' x 67" 5'-4"* 5'-6"*: 1. 25" 12'-0"* 9 0 , 10'-4" 9ft 48" .P 10' 8"* ;11' 0'=* 7_4 5'-4" 4' 25" 11'-8"* 8 0' 91_6 10 ft 48', 9 -8"* 10 67 4 -8"* 5 0 "* 5 0" gp TABLE +18e MULTI SECTION,- WIND ZONE 1 FRAME'TIEDOWN SPACING (FT)` -'MAX. ROOF PITCH 6/12 Max Ma*", ax 20 ft Max. Width 24 ft Max. Width 28 A Max. Width 32 ft;Max..Width7 Wall - Floor I -Beam Spacing ,I -Beam Spacing . I -Beam Spacing `I -Beam Spacing - Height . '. Height ,. 79;5", 95.5'.'-99.5" , • Z9 5" 95.5"-99.5" 95.5-99:5_ 95.5"-99.5" 25" 11'-8"* 12'-0"* 10'-0" 11'-4"* 9'-0" 10'4" 48 9 t8"* , g _4 s. 10'-6"`' 67 5 4"* 4'-4"* 0,* 80 4 8 * 4' 4"*. .' 5' 4 *=° '. 25" 9 -6"* 11'-0"* 9'-0" 9'-4"* 8'-0" `. 9.6 9ft 48 9 0"* ",. '' 8'-4 �* .- . , y� 6 �* :. 90 * , : w.•', 9,_8 * ,. - 6' 8" 67" 5-0"* 4'-51.* 5'-4"* 5'-0"* :. 80' 47-4 4-0"* ' 4'_g * qr$d'*, _ * 5' 0 ,.. 5' O s= 25" T 8"* 9' 6 "* 8'-4" T 8"* 7 6" 8.4' 48, . 8'-8"* T 8":. . 8 8 60° 67 4 8* 4' 4"* 5' 0"* 4' 8* 5 0* 5 -6"* 80' 4 .0"*, NA 4 6'*`, ' 4'-6'* 4' 8'.*' 5' 0„* TABLE 18f- MULTI,SECTION-- WIND ZONE 1 FRAME,''TIEDOWN SPACING (FT) -MAX: ROOF PITCH6/12Ma " h 42 ft Max Width 48 ftMax Width Wall I For 1 BeamaS acid �p g 1 Beam Spacing s m I=BeaSpacing Heigh t : Hei ht = 95'5 99.5" ' g .5 99.5" 95:5"-99.5" 95 25" 121-011* 8,_4, 9 -811 8 ft' 48., 6 8;' 67" 4'-8"* 5'-011* 5 0" 80k ., " 25 11'-0"* T_g" _. -. 8._811 - ,48 67" 4'_8"* 4' 8 * 4 -8"* 80' 40 4'4* 4 6* ra 104"* 70 -011 10•ft 48 �. ,e 8' 6'* `8 67" 4'-4" * 4'-8. 4 8 4' �%�F TES The " * " listed after any tiedown spacing signifies that a 60 degree angle has been exceeded and an additional straD must be added to the tar beam 0 TABLE 18g: MULTI SECTION- WIND ZONE 1 FRAME TIEDOWN;SPACING (FT) - MAX., ROOF PITCH 7/12'1 „ Max. Wall Height Max.: ' Floor , Height 20ft:Max.Width; 1-Beam Spacing, 79.5" ,, 95.5". 99.5" n-24'kMax Width' "' I -Beam Spacing` 79.5" 95.5" . 28ff`Max.Width' "17Beam.Spacing 32ft'Max. Width' ' 1-Beam Spacing 25" 9'-8"* 11'-4--* 9'-0.1 9'-6"* 8'-0" 9-4' 8ft 8°4"* r 67" 5' 0"* 4'-8"* 5'4"* 5 0"* 5'-6"* 5'-8"* _5„* . 4-0 * 4'-8„* - 4! 6"*' �. S� 0"*." 0"*.". a 5' 25' 8'-0"* 9'-8"* 8'_4" 7'_8"* 7'_6" 8'_6" 67" 4'-8"* 4'-4"* 5'-0"* 4'-8"* 5' 0"* 5'4"* � . Sol, 4 0"*._, 25" 6'-8"* 8'-0"* T-8" 6'-8"* 7'-0" 8'-0" 48" 7'4" ; , ' 7'-0"* 8' 0"*' 7-8„* 8 -0"* S'-8" .10.ft 67" 4'-6"* 4'-0"* 4'-8"* 4'-6"* 4'-8"* 5-0"* 80" NA NA 4 4„* 4,_p„* _4=4"* 4'8,,.'" _TABLE 18h-,MULTI SECTION._ WIND ZONE 1 FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING;(FT).- MAX: ROOFIPITCH 7/12 Max: Wall' Height ` Max. - Floor `Height"_ -' '' 36,ft Max. Width I -Beam Spacing 95.SF-995' 42 ft Max. Width ` 1-6eam,Spacing '955 .48ft Max. Width 1-Beam Spacing 25" 10'-8"* 7'-4" 8'_4" 48" .. 8 ft 67 4 6* 4$* 41_811* 80". �' y4 25" 10'-011* 6'4" 7'4" : 9ft 67" 4'-4"* 4'-6"* 4'-6"* 25" 9'-01.* 6'-4" 7'-0" 48" 7'-8"* 7 -8"* .. . ' ., 5'-0" 10 ft 67" 4'-0"* 4 4 * 4'-4. s0.1 NA NA 4'70"* The " * " listed after any tiedown spacing signifies that a 60 degree angle has been exceeded and an additional strap must be added to the far beam. 81 TABLE 19. SINGLE SECTION - WIND ZONE 2 NEAR I BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (FT) -MAX: ROOF PITCH 4.36/12 Max. Width ,L 12 ftMax Width 14 ft Max. Width' `• `" 16 ft Max. Width'18 ft'Maz. Width „Max. Max. ,E6,79.5", Walf Floorm Spacing, IBeam`Spacing' 1-BeamSpacing 1-Beam Spacing* I -Beam SpacingHeight Hji 95.5"-simll, : 95 $". 99si 95.5 99.5" ° 95.5" 99.5" '99.5"• •NA 25'ht 4 -4" 4'-0" 6'-8"T-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" s NA 4'70 ,: 4,'-6" , ; 6'-0" ` . S 8"'� 7 ;P" 67" NA NA NA NA NA NA 4'-8" 4'-6" 5'-8-' " 80", 25" NA NA NA . �`n NA NA NA a NA NA 6'-0" .. NA 6'-0' NA :.. T-0' , NA,- T-0" T-0" 8 ft, 48" NA. NA NA ,, , r 4'_0" 4!-01: 5'_4" 5'_0" 6„ 0" 67" NA NA NA NA NA 4'-0" 4'-0" 5' 0' 80" , NQ . 'NA • NA _ NA NA" " NA. NA `� 4' 6„ 25" NA NA 4NA NA 5'-8" 5'-4" 6'-0" 6'-0"6'-q° Sift 48"NA, NA NA; " NA NA 4' 8"'"5' 6" 67" NA NA NA NA NA 4' 0 NA4'-6°NA NA NA' . NA NA ..NA NA 4Cp^25" 10ft'. ". NA _ 'NA. ° NA NA 'rNA NA 5'-0" NA 4'-8"5'-6" NA 4I_4 . 5'-6" 4 4"- 5' 848 5 0° 67" NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 4'-0" „80'1. NA' ` „ NA, �`NA . NA, `. ` NA NA 1VA NA NA TABLE 19a. MULTI'SkECTION�- WIND ZONE 2 NEAR,I BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (FT) -`MAX: ROOF PITCH 4:36/12 Max ", `Max .. 20 ft Max. Width 24 ft Max: Width 28 ft'Niax. Width e- 32•ft'Max. Width' `- Wall Floor I Beam Spacing I BdamSpacing I -Beam Spacing, I Beam,Spacing Height Height 79 5' 95 5"-99 5 : ' 79 5', 95'S 99 5 ., 95 5-,k , 99 5 95.5 ;; 99 5•' •`� 25" 5'-0" NA 6'-8" 5'-0" 4'_4" T-0" 6 _8' ? _$' 7_8 r7ft = '�NA�� _ . NA �`•: NA. 4' 0" - NA; `. NA` 4' 6" : LL 4'-Q'. .. 6 4 5 8 67" NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 4'-6" a _ 80°, NA .NA. r ,` : NA , . NA, NA.:. NA'.,• . � , NA, 25" 4'-4" NA 6'-0" 4'-4" NA 6'-4" 6'-0" T-0" 7'-0" $ ft` 48" NA ' :. NA , , : . NA. �n,. . NAi ., NA,_ , 4 0" ,:.„ NA �5 4" 5�;0�� - n. 67" NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 4'-0" 4'-0" 80" NA NA NA NA. NA NA NA NA "'NA NA .. 25" 4'-0" NA 5' 4 4'-0" NA 5'-8" 5' 4" 6'-6" 6 -[ Sift -' 48", NA _p .. NA NA NA NA- NA NA -8 4'" '- 4'-6" _ 67 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA _ NA - NA NA -_ NA - NA NA ." NA 4 25" NA NA 4'-8" NA NA 5'-0' 4'-8" 6'-0" 5'_g' 10 ft48 NA "NA . ; ", "NA NA NA. NA , NA. 4'-4". ; 4' 0 67' NA _.. NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 80 NA NA , NA NA` 'NA r 'NA I. _ : '- NA ` :.NA Nq ///-j OF TE ', 82 TABLE 196.SINGLE SECTION -WI ND ZONE 2 FAR i-BEAMIFRAM E TIEDOWN'SPACING (FT)`,- MAX."ROOFPITCHA.36/12 ' Max. Wall Height Max: Floor ` Height';;, 10 ftMax., Width , I-BeamSpacing, 79 5"'e ` ' 95.5"-99.5" 12 ft Max. , � 1-Be4 Spacmg " 95.5"-99:5 ', •14 ft.Max. Width w I-Beam,Spacing 95.5"-99.5". 16 ft Max. Width I-Beam`Spacing 95.5%99.57, 18 ft Max. Width IBeam I 75pacin''g 25" 5'-8" 5'-8" 5.4. 6'4" 6'-0" 6'-0" 7 48" 5178. 5 8",' �a 5 s" 6 -0" , 6!-0'� .. y 61 �1. ' ft 67" 5'-6" 5'-8" 5'-8" 6'-0" 6'-0" 6'-0" 80" . S -6"" 5'-8" 5'4-. :. V-0" 6,_0 , 6'-0" 25" 4'-8" 4'-8" 4'-8" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-4" • 48" 4 8'''� 4 8 ',' • -, S�_O!x 8ft 67" 4'4" 4'-8" 4'4" 5'-0" 5'4" 5'-4" 80" V_6" 4"4" 4'-8"- 5'_6i� �. 5'=0 r . 5' 4 25" 4'-0" 4'4" 4'-0" 4'4" 4'-6" 4'-8" "'•` 48" q'_01. " ' O"' 4-0��, 4, 4,,.� , - : , 4, 6 ` 9 ft 67" 4' 0" 4' 0" 4' 0" 4'_4" 4'_6" 4'-8" `� 80- NA ,. '4'-0", 4'-0" ' ` � • , - •q� r �: '4�-6�� 4"_$1. 25" NA NA NA NA NA 4'-0" 48" NA NA` NA .,_ , NA® NA N-0 loft 67" NA NA NA NA NA 4'-0" 80" _ NA NA' 'NA 'NA, ' "NA-. 4'-0" TABLE 19c. MULTI SECTION,- WIND ZONE, 2 FAR I -BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (FT) -MAX. ROOF PITCH 4.36/12 , V Max. Wall Height Max., Floor Height 20 ft Max. Width z l-Beam Spacing A 79.5" ; ,w 95.5"-99.5" 24 ft Max. Width I -Beam Spacing �� 79 5 95.5"-99 5' 28 ft Max. Width I -Beam Spacing, 95.5"-99.5', 32 ft Max. Width 1-Beam;Spacing, 95.5"-99.5" 25" 8'4" 8 0 7 -6" 7'4" 6'-0" 514" 48,i'', T-8" 7 -g" T78" 7.'-8" " T-8"' V-S" 7ft 67" 7'-6" T-6" T-6" T-6" T-6" 7-4" 80", .- 7-4", . r. , ,7-4",. Tr4 �d,: 7:4"... T-4 ��-0'. 25" 7-6" 7'4" T-0" 6'4" 5'-8" 5'-6" 48" 7 0'r 7-0" T-0 ,� 7 oil .. , `� 7'-0' 6 8 8.ft 67' 6'-8" 6'-8" 6'-8" 6'-8" 6'-8" 6'-8" 80" 6 6'".," -V-6" 6' 6'-. a 6'-8" �" �, 6"8 6'' V 25" 6'-8" 6-8" 6'-6" 6'-0" 5'-6" 5'-0" 48.!6'_4" = 6 4' a 6' 4" _ 6 4" ,_ s;; 6'=4' (4' 9 ft 67" 6'-0" 6'-0" 6'-0" 6'4" 6'-0" 6'-0" 80,E , 5, 811- - . �5' 8° '' 6� 0. � , 6"-0 ', 6!41.. _ 25" 6'-0" 6'-0" 6'-0" 5'-8" 5'-0" 5'-0" 48- V-8" ,. 5 -8„ ,' 5'=8 °' S $"' 51-6 , , 5 .81. 30 ft 67" 5-6" 5'_6" 5%6" 5'-8" 5'-8" 5'-8" Boll, 5, 4;, . 5 _4 5' 4 5' 6" 5' 6" 5 _6 c 1111111 11J.", .11L 83 TABLE 19d. MULTI SECTION,- WIND ZONE,2 NEAR I -BEAM FRAMEJIEDOINN SPACING (FT) MAX. ROOF 5 12 -PITCH Max Max. 20 ft Max. Width 24 ft Max. Width 28 ft Max. Width 32 ft Max. Width Wall , Floor I -Beam Spacing I -Beam Spacing I Beam Spacing, 1 Beam Spacing Height Height 79,5" 95.5 995,�° 95.5"' 99.5 95.5", ., 99:5"" ,'°'955"99.5" 25" NA NA NA NA NA NA 4'-0" 4'-0" 8 ft° 48��,,NA •. NA NA NA NA NA . . NA` . - NA 67" NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA `80" NA _ NA' NA. NA , _ NA, ' NA." NA NA. 25" NA NA NA NA NA NA _ NA - NA 9ft 48" NA, - - NA NA _ NA NA, NA•, NA :' NA 67" NA NA NA NA :a• NA NA NA NA NA, g•. NA ' .'�- NA. r `- NA NA Nq'. "NA NA ` 25" 48" NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA loft` NA NA _ NA : . _ NA" NA- . NA .. NA NA, 67" NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA ' 801, NA NA �: NA :. - . NA NA NA z w ,,,NA '- {, NA' "- IMDLc ive: iwuu7 SECTION WINDZONE2'FARI BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (FT) MAX ROOF PITCH 5/12 ' Max ,Max 20 ft Max. Width 24 ft Max Width, 28 ft Max. Width ' • 32'ft Max: Width-' Wall Floor I -Beam Spacing 1-Beam Spacing I Beam Spacing :1-Beam Spacing' " Height Heighf .' , t795, 99.5" `" ` 95.5" 95.5"-89.5"� 25" 4' 8' 4 4 4'-0" NA �48�� 4 8" '>, - 4'-4" q-_q,- 4 0' - 4 0' 0' 4, 4" . ,• Nq` 5" r�448" 4 -0 ',�• 9ft4' 4'-- �,rNA 0" q�_Os NA7" ` q'-0"NANA 0', _ qr 0„ NA NA , NA 25"... NA NA NA , NA 10 ft - " AS" 4' 0" . , NA i;; , NA ; . NAw 67" NA NA NA NA . o . 80' NA NA , NA NA . TABLE 19E MULTI SECTION -.WIND ZONE 2 FAR I -BEAM FRAME TIEDOW14 SPACING;(FT),' MAX:, ROOF PITCH 6/1-2 Max. Max.,20.ft Max. Width 24 ft Max. Width 28 ft Max. Width " y, 32 ft Max. Width:. Wall Floor I -Beam Spacing 1 Beb'" Spacing; :'I -Beam Spacing 1=Beam Spacing Height H25 ht. 79.Sq g g 5" .. 95 4 5 .95 5"-99.5" , 95 5: 99 5 q9 09 NA NA m 4'-4"- fj NA ,... 67 4'-0' 4'-0" x NA NA 80 ... �NA �4'-0 NA.. NA' 25 NA NA NA NA 4'-0, NA° 9 ft ,, NA , . , NA _ NA NA NA 80'NA,- NA 254 85 TABLE 20b. SINGLE SECTION -WIND.ZONE 3TAR I -BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (FT) - MAX. ROOF PITCH 4.36/12 Max. Wall Height Max. floor Height 10 ft Max. Width I -Beam Spacing 79.5"',, 12 ft Max. Width, I -Beam Spacing, 95.51-99.511" 14 ft Max. Width I -Beam Spqcing, 95.S11-99.51 16 ft Max. 'Width I -Beam Spacing 18 ft Max. Width. 6iam.5pacirig 25" 4'-0" 4-4- 4'-6" 4-4- 4'-8" 4'-8" 7ft 48", 4'-0" 4'4' — 4'-6" 4'-8" 4--8" 67" 4'-0" 4-4- 4'-6" 4'-8" 4'-8" 4'-8" Poll 4--0", 4-4. 4'-6"' 4'-8" 4'41. 4 8 25" NA NA NA 4'.0" 4-4- 4-4- `8ft 4 NA NA NA 4-4- 4'-0"l , 67" NA NA NA 4'-0" 4'-0" 4-4- 801, NA NA NA 4!-0!' 4'-0" 25" NA NA NA NA NA NA 48"' NA NA,,, NA'= - NA, Nk,, 67" NA NA NA NA NA NA 80!' NA, NA NA NA NA 25" NA NA NA NA NA NA 10ft- '48" — NA NA NA NA NA, NA 67" NA NA NA NA NA NA 80". NA: NA NA "NA NA -TABLE 20c. MULTI SECTION WIND ZONE 3 FAR I -BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (FT) -'MAX. ROOF PITCH . 4.36/12 Max. x. Wall Height Max: Floor . .Height 20ftMax.Width 1-Beam Spacing', �9 "95.5'.ii9r; 2!tftMiix.Width . '',I-BeamSpacing' 79S! 28 ft Ma])i.'WIdth I Beam Spacing 95.5 -,9 .5 9 '32 ft Max. Width, I-BeamSpaicing,,'" 95.5"-99.5" 25" V-S" 4'-8" 51-01, 4'-8" 4'-4" 4'-0" 7ft 48'! 6"-0"" 6'-0" 6-4- 6'-0_" W-8" 67" 6'-0" 6'-0" 6'-0" 6'-0" 5'-4" A 25" '4- 4'-6" 4'-8" 4'-6" 4'-0" NA Bft 4S" 5,4, 5-8" 5-13" 0 4'-6 67' 54" 5'-4" 5'-4" 5'-4" 5'-4" 5'-4" Sol, 51-011 25" 4'-8" 4'-4" 4'-4" NA NA 9 ft• 48!" 53'0'(` 5,, b,, 4-4-. 67" 4'-8" 4'-8" W-S" 4'-8" 4'-8" 80", 4--8" 4'-S" 4'-8" �4-4- 4'-8" 4'-8" 25" 4'-6" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" NA NA 10 ft, 4'-8 -8T 4 4 -011z, 67 4'-4" 4'-6" _6.. �4 4'-6" 4 '-6" 4'-6" 80"7 .4' '4" 4'-4" 4-44"'- 7 4-4- 4'4" ., wt 1AV., I I/f/,. Rj SIDEWALL VERTICAL ANCHORS Homes designed for Wind Zones II and III also require vertical tie downs along the sidewalls (Figure 63). The vertical tie down brackets will be factory installed. Vertical and frame sidewall tie downs may connect to one double -headed anchor or each to its i111 I i 1 ! ��l, own dedicated anchor per the spacing requirements listed in Tables 19 and 20. If addi- tional brackets are required to be added or existing brackets are required to be relocat- `.� •°•• RD EN •.,� d ed due to interferences or site conditions, install Mastercraft #5705 or steel angle brackets and straps as shown in Figure 63. LONGITUDINAL FRAME ANCHORS ;Cf AGRICU,- rURY Use Table 21 to determine the number of longitudinal frame anchors required at each W r end of the home. The longitudinal frame anchors may be factory installed, site installed ' or connected to a crossmember within 3" of the main I-beam. % °4 tl►tfrrGq", NOTE: �i�%`°•'•00 l ley •••° 7 �`, Friction is assumed to contribute to the resistance in the longitudinal direction when i�� ••......�••,�,�GJ��� piers are no more than 64" high. Friction from a single block pier is assumed for piers less than 44" high. Friction from a double block pier is assumed for piers between 44" and 64" high. _. TABLE 21. WIND ZONE 1 LONGITUDINAL FRAME TIEDOWN QUANTITIES (QUANTITY EACH END -OF HOME) ° Single Section' Multi Section . Tnple Section Max: Max. (18 ft Max.Floor Width)(32;ft Max. Floor Width) (48 ft"Max Floor Width) .-Mmimum Unit Lengths Minimum Unit Lengths f Minimum Unit, Lengths.: -° Fitch -Height ';36 42 ;:48 54's, 60 66 72 .80 36'=j 42 „48' ,54' 60 66` 72 80' 36' ';42 48` 54'. .60' 66'• 72_ ,80.'. 24" 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 36 1' 1 �, 1 ` 1` 1• 0, x; 1'_ 0 •d� 2 2=� ` '1- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 521 0, 0' 2,. ':°1° , 0. 0,==, 0=. - 0. 0, 0,, 64" 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 4 3 3 2 1 1 0 0 2 2q 3, ' 2 34 0 `0 0", 0 .0� 4`°, 3°° `0 , 0 _ 0" '. 4 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 6 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 36 �; 2 ° 0 0; 0' _ . 0 0°' 0 0; 2," ' 1 0` 0 - A 0 = 0, 0° 7 q4 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 52 "� 3 2 2 2 1 1 H 0 0_ 5 8 64 HEIGHT GREATER THAN 64 a WIND ZONE .1 LONGITUDINAL FRAMESIED0INN QUANTITIES ('QUANTITY EACH END OF HOME)_ sMax. Max.. 'Max. Home Width` �. Roof"' Single section `Multi Section Triple Height ,Prtch , + '' _ 2ft 28 ft 32ft 48 ft16 0f' 36 ff° 7,ft" 4.36 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 �-=75ft,° ' 436 '� ly22 ,.,;: 2 Y _ 2 a`.3`:3 c H3 4 4, 5 7.,_. , 4.36 2 Z 2 2 2— 3 4 4 5 7 K. NA NA y NA = 3_'=r° q,.._ 5 -8ft r: 6 NA NA NA NA NA 3 3 4 5 5 8 r= _ �2 NA NA;,<'' -. 3.4 4 ti°.: 5 —6 n 4.36 2 2fl 2� 3 3. 3., 4 5 5� 7 NA a 5'ti .., 6 NA NA NA NA NA 3 4 4 5 6 8 4NA NA NA NA,"r =4 5 �',5- fi"` 9. 4.36 2V 2 2 3 3 3 4` 4 5 6 8 `10 NA 8 ft 6 NA NA NA NA NA 3 4 5 5 6 9 m=NA r-NA NA NA 3„ , 4 5. 6 fi 9 87 n - TABLE 22 WIND ZONE 2 LONGITUDINAL FRAME TIE�DIOWN QUANTITIES (EACH END OF HOME) Max.. Max: Home Width Wall Roof Single Section �' Multi Section ° b Triple 10 4 Height, ; Pitch ft �, .12 ft 14 ft ': 16 ft ` 18ft_j° 20ft� ',. •24ft.. 2$ft,.32ft,: 36ft - 48ff ` ,`° 7ft'", 3 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 6 8 `p 4.365 a2 s 2 3 y ,<<�3r 6 � • 1 75ft . 3" 4.3Cr 2 2, 2 3,'_', 3 3, •; 3 r3• 3 4 �, 5 6 6 9 10 3 2 11 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 9 10 4:36' �3 ` s 3 ,. . 3°<` 3 4 4 10�,' ', °. Sft 5 NA NA NA NA NA 4 5 6 10 • 11 12 6 ".N A ""�. NA! n NA .. _ 5 7 NA NA NA NA NA 5 6 7 8 12 13 3 °;, �4,.� F F4 4 Sµ. , 10 4.36 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 „ 8 11 12 9 ft 5 NA :, .. �, a NA _ ' NAr' " � NA " NA 5 6:-'�.j.. 8 11 6 NA NA NA NA NA 5 6 7 8 12 13 r NA " -NA,: NA, NA 5 " s. 6 �,'12 ` y 14 T �` 9 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 °, 4.36,E°•.3 ;: 3 4 "�°� y q` 4., 5. �� 6 ...: „7•- 8 8," 10 11. 12 30 ft 5 NA NA NA NA NA 5 6 f• , 7 9 NA ,` NA NA. _m NA -. NA • 5 6 = 8'` �• 9` 12 "12. 13 7 NA NA NA NA NA 5 7 8 9 13 14 15 TABLE 23: WIND ZONE 3 LONGITUDINAL FRAME TIED•OWN'QUANTITIES (EACH'END Max Max Max.` Home Widtf� Wall Height. Roof _ Single Section_ Multi §ection ` Triple ' ': ,. Prtch 10 ft12 ft.14 ft „` , 16 ft •� 18 ft 20 ft 24 ft ." 28 ft '' 32 ft -, • 36 ft "48 ft� v. . 7ft 3 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 7 10 11 4 36 2 "% U3 3 �. ,. x ' : 4°" 4� , 5 6 7` eIT, 12 . "7 5 ft 3 2_ 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 10 12 4.36 3° %-4 ," 4=� 5.` a, 6 ""` ;•° 7 °- 8�' , �,..11 13 3 3 3 3- 4 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 3 °` 3 `' Tte 4r 4 4,` 5� 7 9 '; 12 13 8 ft 5 "' NA NA NA NA NA 5 6 8 9 12 14 6 . NA E -DNA ` ,:,; _NA ',� `NA",; . NA . . 5 -;: 7 r 7 NA NA NA NA NA 6 7 8 10 14 16 3, 3 4 q a 5 . 5 6' 8 9.2• 12 13 , 436 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 14 �9ft • NA NA NA. NA "wy .. NA., �� :6," is,�'. w 6 NA NA NA NA NA 6 7 9 1014 16 7 NAr , NAd617 m ° " 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 13 14 �a 436 �. 5 ,; • 5 ,� o; 6 7 7 7 b 8 9 9 loft"", 5 NA NA NA NA NA 6 7 9 10 14 VA ._ ' ��'NA NA - NAB 6 " '' = g 9 - 15 n 16 7 > 1_`.' 7 NA NA NA NA NA 6 �11 � 8 10 11 16 18 Irrr��tr \``01tj IN G M e, .W AGRICU UR % llwl MARRIAGE LINE VERTICAL ANCHORS (WIND ZONES II AND III ONLY) In Wind Zones II and III, marriage line anchors are required at each column along the marriage wall. There may be manufacturer -installed brackets indicating required tie down locations When to install marriage line anchors. Anchors (may be identified by tags or paint). If brackets are not present, then an alternative ac- along the marriage line must ceptable connection method, such as steel angles (provided by the manufacturer) must be installed prior to the sec - be used (Figure 63). If necessary to avoid interference with piers, the tie down location and half of a multi -section may be offset horizontally from the column by a maximum of 12 inches. home being set. TAG UNIT FRAME AND VERTICAL ANCHORS Tag unit anchoring is not covered in this manual. The required anchoring details will accompany homes with tag units. PORCH POST ANCHORS Each post that requires an anchor will have a tiedown bracket attached from the factory and be designated by a pier label. Homes with roof pitches of 4.36/12 or less do not require frame tiedowns below a full width endwall porch. Required frame and vertical tiedowns in Wind Zone 2 and 3 may begin on -center spacing at the corner porch post/endwall location. This will also satisfy the Sidewall Frame Anchor requirement of locating one "no more than two feet from each end of home" stated on page 75. Homes with roof pitches above 4.36/12 must also contain frame tiedowns below endwall porches and can be combined with vertical tiedown brackets at porch posts. OFFSET UNIT ANCHORS Anchors installed on offset units will be installed per the standard tiedown charts unless otherwise instructed by details that accompany the home. STEP 2. DETERMINE TIEDOWN CONFIGURATION Tiedown spacings have been provided when the tie down strap is connected to the near I-beam and/or when the strap is connected to the far I-beam. STEP 3. SELECT ANCHORS Use the torque probe results from Prepare the Site, STEP 6. DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPACITY (p. 19) and the anchor manufacturer instructions se- lect the type and length of anchor to use. The installed ground anchor size (length) must be listed (i.e. approved) for the soil class. Make sure the anchor is of sufficient length such that the top of the helix is below the frost line. Select a shaft diameter sufficient to resist excessive torsion, "ring -off' (when the helix or anchor head separates from shaft) or shaft splitting. Consult the anchor supplier for guidance. Review all of STEP 4. INSTALL ANCHORS (p. 90) and STEP 6. INSTALL STRAPS (p. 91) before making final anchor selections to determine when single headed vs. double headed anchors should be used. Follow the specifications in Table 24 when se- lecting stabilizing system components. TABLE 24. ANCHOR TYPES ncofty ioC s ,� 2; 3 4A IN A� .Helixsoil�anchor`q„ n �\\�N• Rock anchor 1 (for use in solid rock only) -,,Concrete, anchor . , .. _ C c ete ONLY 'ry -� °Q X AGICU URE • `y.�( OF TE��\�� 89 TABLE 26. ANCHOR SYSTEM MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS Component 'Specification Anchors must be tested and listed to resist a minimum ultimate load of 4,725 Ibs and a minimum allowable working load of 3,150 Ibs or ultimate and corresponding working load limited by soil conditions and anchor Anchors length. The working load is the maximum load the designer can use. Ground anchors must be provided with protection against weather deterioration and corrosion at least equivalent to that provided by a coating of zinc on steel of not less than 0.030 oz per sq ft of surface coated. Straps must be minimum 1-1/4 x 0.035 zinacoated (0:030 oz"per sq "ft) steel strapping conformin'g.'to''. A ; Straps - �ASTM D3953 97 Type 1 Grade 1 Finish B with'a minimum allowable working,load capacity of 3,150 Ibs, and a minimum ultimate load of 4 725g1bs Slit"or cut edges•of zinc-coate'd.strappirig'do not `need to=be zinc°-' coated.,"_ `ground The size and type of stabilizer plate, if required by the anchor manufacturer, will be specified in the anchor manufacturer's instructions. Stabilizer plates must be provided with protection against weather Stabilizer plates deterioration and corrosion at least equivalent to that provided by a coating of zinc on steel of not less than 0.30 oz per sq ft of surface coated. Alternatively, ABS stabilizer plates may be used when listed and certi- fied for such use. STEP 4. INSTALL ANCHORS Before beginning anchor installation, check for obstructions under the home such as piers and frame members that may interfere with the tie down strapping. Check with utility companies to determine the location of underground utilities, such as electrical and phone lines, and water, sewer and gas pipes, that may be buried in potential an- chor locations. Also check for homeowner -installed wires and pipes, such as those connecting exterior lighting or sheds to the home. These must also be avoided. FRAME ANCHORS Frame anchors can be installed in two ways, in -line and against a stabilizer plate. The two methods are discussed below: In -Line Configuration The in -line configuration (Figure 55) for homes can be used in Wind Zone I only. Typi- cally, in -line anchors are used under high homes where the anchors can be installed from under the home after the home is set. In -line anchors can also be installed before the home is set, however precisely aligning the anchor with the home both vertically and horizontally is difficult. Using swivel connectors for the strap to beam connection can provide some horizontal flexibility. To install in -line frame anchors, drive the anchor into the ground at an angle and loca- tion such that a straight line can be drawn from the tip of the anchor through the anchor head and to the connection point on the I-beam (Figure 56). FRAME FRAME TIEDOWN TIEDOWN STRAP MAIN BEAM STRAP MAIN BEAM Grading area around anchors. Anchor heads should not rest in sunken spots. Grade the ground so that water does not collect around anchor heads, but runs away from the anchor and out from un- der the home. Do not bury anchor heads. Figure 65. In -line anchor con- figuration Figure 56. Stabilizer plate configuration GROUND ANCHOR \ rierc GROUND \ W/ STABILIZER \ ANCHOR PLATE -------` Anchor alignment. Properly aligning the anchor is critical to performance. Stabilizer Plate Configuration Stabilizer plate configurations (Figure 57) are suitable for homes in all wind zones. An- chors may be installed after the home is set. A stabilizer device, typically an ABS or metal plate, is used to prevent the top of the anchor from slicing through the soil when the load is applied. Stabilizer plates are available in a variety of widths. Choose the widest plate that can be driven into the soil to maximize resistance to movement. The LAHJ may have stabilizer plate requirements. M Install anchors with stabilizer plates as follows: 1. Measure. To determine the stabilizer plate location, measure from the top of the I-beam to the ground directly under it and then use the same measure- ment directly away from that point under the beam (Figure 67). The anchor and plate must be under the home, but within six inches of the exterior wall for a near beam set and ten inches minimum from the exterior wall for a far beam set. Be careful not to place in a location that will interfere with skirting. (LOOSE) Figure 57. Determining anc- hor and stabilizer plate loca- tion (PROPERLY TENSIONED) STABILIZER PLATE I]STABILIZER PLATE —GROUND ANCHOR GROUNDANCHOR 10° 2. Install anchor. To assure that the anchor attachment point will end up at the stabilizer plate, start the anchor insertion approximately 12 inches back from from the desired location if using a 48 inch long anchor, or approximately 16 inches if using a 60 inch long anchor. Install the anchor at about 10 degrees off vertical, with the head tilted away from the home. Install the anchor to a depth of approximately one half its length. 3. Drive stabilizer plate. Drive the stabilizer plate into the ground to its full depth at the point determined in Step 1. 4. Complete anchor installation. Screw the anchor the rest of the way into the ground. The finished anchor must be installed to its full depth. When the anc- hor strap is properly tensioned it will pull the anchor head and shaft into the stabilizer plate. VERTICAL ANCHORS To install vertical anchors, screw the anchor into the ground directly under the strap at- tachment point on the home until the bottom of the anchor head is flush with the ground or no more than one inch above grade. STEP 5. INSTALL STRAPS Follow the instructions below to connect straps from the home to sidewall frame, end wall frame and vertical anchors. Always protect straps at sharp corners including around I -beams with radius clips or other methods (Figure 58). Radius clips may be fabricated from galvanized steel strap formed to fit around corners. ail LONGITUDINAL R BRACKET PROTECT TOP AND BOTTOM iv OF BEAM IF I -BEAM STRAPIS WRAPPED AROUND BEAM cL SPLICING STRAPS Splicing may be required when a pre-cut strap is of insufficient length. Splices must be made by overlapping the straps by 12 inches, applying one splice clip from above and the other from below; use a crimping tool to tightly seal the splice clips (Figure 69). Do not run any portion of the splice through an anchor head bolt. APPLY SPLICE CLIPS IN DIRECTION OF ARROWS --� STRAP APPROX. 12" FRAME ANCHORS Install straps to frame anchors as follows: Connect strap to home. Connect one end of the strap to the top of the (- beam using approved buckles or clips (swivel or hook clip preferred). When frame ties are connected to the bottom of the beam it must be within 3" of a crossmember. TO G� O 1O WRAP STRAP AROUND 20 CONNECT HOOK TO TOP OF MAIN MAIN BEAM BEAM AND CONNECT OTHER END OF STRAP TO ANCHOR HEAD. Connect strap to anchor. Connect the other end of the strap to the split bolt in the anchor. Leave enough strap length to be able to make three complete turns,or minimum required per manufacturer's installation instructions, around the bolt before it becomes tight (approximately 2-1/2 inches per turn or 13 inches total). Fewer than three turns, or required per manufacturer's installa- tion instructions, and the strap may not hold onto the bolt when force is ap- plied. Conversely, too many turns may not fit within the U-channel of the anc- hor head. Follow the procedure outlined in Figure 61. Figure 58. Radius clips Figure 69. Tie down strap splice Figure 60. Strap to beam connection 92 D T0�� y 7? /y ND E40 1OPLACE THE STRAP THROUGH THE AIN SEAM INSERTCONNECT HOOK TO TOP or MAIN OLT AROUND ® BEAM AND CO NECT OTHER END OF O THE AN HOR TENSIONAAEDAANBDINTO SLOTTED SHANK OF THE TENSION STRAP TO ANCHOR HEAD. LOOSELY ATTACH THE HEX NUT. BOLT AND BEND UP TO 90% O USING A 15/16' SOCKET © ONCE TENSIONED TO THE POINT O7 ONCE FULLY TENSIONED, ALIGN IF APPROVED BY THE MANUFACTURER, OR OPEN END WRENCH, THAT COUNTER -CLOCKWISE THE SQUARE NECK OF THE BOLT DOUBLE HEAD ANCHORS MAY BE ROTATE CLOCKWISE, RESISTANCE APPEARS, USE A 5/6' WITH THE SQUARE RECESS IN THE USED FOR BOTH DIAGONAL AND WRAPPING THE STRAP OPEN END WRENCH TO HOLD THE ANCHOR HEAD AND TIGHTEN THE VERTICAL TIE -DOWN STRAP AROUND THE TENSION SQUARE NECK WHILE HEX NUT. THIS WILL DRAW THE TENSIONING. TENSION THE DIAGONAL BOLT. REPOSITIONING THE 15116' TWO TOGETHER AND LOCK THE TIE -DOWN STRAP FIRST. FOLLOW TENSIONING WRENCH TO CONTINUE SYSTEM INTO FINAL POSITION. STEPS 3 THROUGH 7 TO INSTALL TENSIONING. REPEATAS REQUIRED. STRAPS TO ANCHOR HEAD. Figure 61. Procedure for connecting the strap to frame and anchor 3. Pretension anchor. For anchors with stabilizer plates, pretension the anchor by pulling it up to the stabilizer plate using the strap and take-up bolt to move the anchor head. Continue pulling the strap until the plate moves a small // amount (about 1/2 inch). This is called packing the plate and it will yield the • strongest resistance (the bottom of the anchor head should be a maximum Anchor head location. As one inch above the top of the stabilizer plate). the anchor is pulled up to meet the stabilizer plate, the LONGITUDINAL FRAME ANCHORS head of the anchor will rise. Attach straps to the bracket welded by the manufacturer to the frame (Figure 62). If no In its final position, the bot- brackets have been installed, use approved beam clamps designed specifically for this tom of the anchor head purpose, available from anchor suppliers or connect the strap to a spring hanger or a should be no more than 1/4 crossmember (within 3" of the main I-beam). Connect straps to anchors following same inch above the top of the procedure as for sidewall frame anchors. Protection of the strap at sharp corners must stabilizer plate. be provided (p.91). MAIN BEAM Figure 62. Longitudinal frame anchor attachment method PIER _q LONGITUDINAL BRACKET TIEDOWN STRAP ANCHOR WITH STABILIZER PLA 93 MARRIAGE WALL COLUMN Figure 63. Sidewall and mar- 1/8" THICK x 1"DIAMETER riage line vertical tie down WASHERS FOR SPACER connections. BETWEEN BRACKET $ PERIMETER RIM JOIST AT MATING LINE 9MM16"x MARRIAGE WALL COLUMN TIEDOWNS ANGLE BRACKET OR 5/1INSTALLED WITH IL' 3" FULL ANGLE BRACKET INSTALLED WITH FACING AWAY FROM THREAD 'L' FACING TOWARDS OUTSIDE OUTSIDE EDGE OF LAGS. EDGE OF FLOOR SYSTEM FLOOR SYSTEM MARRIAGE WALL LOCATION 3/8" 4" MIN. 3/8" SIDEWALL 1�� 2" 0 7/16" 1 1/2" HOLE 5/8" SIDEWALUTIEDOWN STRAPS 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-1/ " AT MARRIAGE LINE: 45 _ ANGLE BRACKET TO BE OF 9MM x 3" OR 5/16" x 3" FULL 11 GA. (MIN.) STEEL x 1-1/2" THREAD LAGS THRU BRACKET 3/8" x 1-1/2" ANGLE MEMBER. INTO OUTER MOST RIM JOIST O AT SIDEWALL: AT EXTERIOR WALLS. ANGLE BRACKET TO BE OF 12 GA. (MIN.) STEEL x 1-1/2" SIDEWALL LOCATION x 1-1/2" ANGLE MEMBER. SLOT NOT REQUIRED. TIEDOWN STRAP MAY BE INSTALLED BETWEEN HORIZONTAL FLANGE OF ANGLE BRACKET AND FLOOR JOIST PERIMETER RAIL. BRACKET WILL BE ANGLE BRACKET TIEDOWN INSTALLED IN THE FACTORY. ,1;1\a• VERTICAL TIEDOWN N RADIUS ANCHOR 111}Illlfl//� CLIP BP-10 VERTICAL TIEDOWN AV I N,/�j��///� BRACKET `��� .• D �eNge�'�i�.. INSTALLER TO FABRICATE RADIUS CLIP BY PLACING o STRAIGHT 3" LENGTH OF 1-1/4" x .035" TIE -DOWN o 0 o BRACKET : AGRICU STRAP IN ANCHOR SLOT AND PHYSICALLY BEND THE o INSTALLED WITH ... . SURE ;V STRAP TO CONFIGURATION SHOWN ABOVE. (8) .131 x 1-1/2" RADIUS CLIP MUST BE INSTALLED ON ALL NAILS. �2[LGN LONGITUDAL FRAME TIE -DOWN ANCHORS, MASTERCRAFT #5705 TIEDOWN ���� •'• O 1 0 �;.�'��� SIDEWALL V VERTICAL TIE -DOWN ALL VERTICAL ANCHORS BRACKET AND BRACKET (SIDEWALL BRACKET ONLY) DOWN STEP 6. TIGHTEN AND ADJUST STRAPS After all anchors have been installed and pre -tensioned, recheck all anchor straps to assure that they are tight and that the anchor shafts have remained in contact with the stabilizer plates. Do not over tension straps. 94 Connect Utilities This chapter contains procedures and requirements for the connection and testing of utility hook-ups. Responsibility for making utility connections varies by location. Consult the LAHJ and the utility before connecting the home to any utilities. CONNECT=ELECTRICAL SERVICE (p 95)< STEP 2, CONNECT WATER SERVICE (p 98) STEP 3 CONNECT.�GAS,SERVICE,:(p 100) STEP 4 CONNECT, OIL SERVICES(p 102)^` STEP 1. CONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE The home is designed for connection to an electrical wiring system rated at 120/240 volt AC. Service connection requirements depend on whether the meter will be in- stalled on a post or pole or mounted on the home more than 6 feet from the circuit Special precautions when breaker panel. It is recommended that this connection be performed by a licensed elec- installing electrical ser- trician. vice. Installation of the METER MOUNTED ON POST OR POLE (OR MOUNTED ON THE HOME MORE electric power to the home THAN 6 FEET FROM THE CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL) can cause exposure to live Feeder Wire and Equipment Sizes electrical circuits. The neu- The feeder must contain four continuous insulated, color -coded, feeder conductors, tral conductor must not be with one used as the equipment grounding conductor (Figure 64). The current rating grounded in the distribution (in amperes) of the home can be found on the tag located on the outside next to the panel board. Exposure to feeder or service entrance, and on the electrical distribution panel. Using this infor- live electrical circuits or im- mation, determine the required feeder wire size from Table 26. These sizes are based proper grounding of the on an ambient temperature of 86 degrees Fahrenheit and do not take voltage drop into conductor in the panel board may result in severe consideration. shock or possible electro- Acceptable conductor types are: RHH, RHW, RHW-2, THHN, THHW, THW, THW2, cution. A qualified installer THWN, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2, SE, USE, and USE-2. must make the connections for the electric power. MAIN PANEL OVERHEAD SERVICE ENTRY Figure 64. Electrical feeder EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE GROUND -- CONDUIT TO connection when meter is on a post or pole or mounted on BUS BAR NEUTRAL SERVICE HEAD METER BY UTILITY the home more than 6 feet BUS BAR COMPANY from the circuit breaker pan - el. CONDUIT BONDING STRAP DISCONNECT NOT INSTALLED (FUSED) ( TOOGGROUNDING ROD ~AT FACTORYCONDUIT TO i , /� GROUNDING LUG TO BLACK -"HOT" TO A OR B --TO MAIN GROUNDING SCREW CHASSIS PANEL TO CONNECT NEUTRAL Power supply. A large RED -"HOT" TO A OR B TO GROUND enough power supply must EXTERIOR WHITE TO NEUTRAL BUS BAR be available at the site. An WALL GRND TO EQUIPMENT GRND METER BY inadequate power supply UTILITY COMPANY may result in improper op - METER METER eration of and possible ENCLOSURE CONDUIT damage to motors and ap- 1/4" AIR SPACE BETWEEN DISCONNECT pliances. It may also in - METER ENCLOSURE AND (FUSED) N.M. CONDUIT crease electricity costs. EXTERIOR WALL UNDERGROUND SIDE VIEW --TO MAIN SERVICE ENTRY Ci .ALLAP UL nONS) PANEL TO GROUNDING ROD 95 TABLE 26. ELECTRICAL FEEDER WIRE AND EQUIPMENT SIZES FOR COPPER AND ALUMINUM OR COPPER -CLAD ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS Main Min. , ;� Copper' Conductors Breaker Size In Neutral Feeder Minimum , Size 'Rate Red 8� Black White ` Green ` Bare ,Panel Box" Load` . Way Conduit v . ''- (Power) ° . , h (Neutral) ,"(Grounding) -. Ground, (AMPS)°'° (AMPS);Diamefen(in)° (Cu) (Cu)' 50 40 1-1/4 #4 AWG #8 AWG #10 AWG #8 '100 80 1-1 /4 :#4 AWG' _ #4 AWG .' #8;AWG�#8 i 125 100 1-1/4 #2 AWG #3 AWG #6 AWG #8 150, 120 1-1/2, _#1A1NG #1 AWG _#6 AWG, #6 200 160 2 2/0 AWG 2/0 AWG #6 AWG #4 45 `, .180, 2 3/O AWG ° ` 3/0 AWG #4 AWG' 400 320 3 400 kcmil 400 kcmil #3 AWG 1/0 Bie'aker Size.m, J Pariel Box`', (AMPS)` Neutral Feeder' Load:" (AMPS). -,Size_Race- way Conduit.' Diameter (in)_. Aluminum or Copper -Clad Aluminum`Conductors-;' Red&Black (Powerp (Al):, .(AI)r White (Neutral) Green, (Grounding) (AI) Bare ;^ Ground' (AI). 50 40 1-1/4 #2 AWG #8 AWG #8 AWG #6 10080�'' `_ t-1/4. #2 AWG #2 AWG ; .#6 AWG ��` #6 125 100 2 1/0 AWG #1 AWG #4 AWG #6 r ,150: 2/O AWG„ `„ `1/OAWG ..'•P #4 AWG=�� a, #4'y, 200 160 2-1/2 4/0 AWG 4/0 AWG #4 AWG #2 225 180 ;z .' .; 2•.1/2 25OPkcmil u,1 ; 4/0 AWG #2 AWG `' 1%0 ' ^' 400 320 3-1/2 600 kcmil 600 kcmil #1 AWG 3/0 Grounding The home must be properly grounded to protect the occupants. The only safe and ap- proved method of grounding the home is through an electrically -isolated grounding bar in the home's distribution panel board. This grounds all non -current -carrying metal parts to the electrical system in the home at a single point. The ground conductor of the power supply feeder cable in turn connects the grounding bar to a good electrical ground back through the power supply system. Therefore, for 120/240 volt service a four wire power supply feeder cable is required. It is important to: • Isolate (insulate) grounded circuit conductor (neutral or white wire) from the grounding conductors (green wires) and from equipment enclosures and other grounded parts. • Isolate (insulate) the neutral circuit terminals in the distribution panel board and in ranges, clothes dryers, and counter -mounted cooking units from the equipment enclo- sure. Feeder Connections Feeder connections are made from above or from below the home as follows: • From above —mast weatherhead feeder. The routing, connection, and support of the service drop must meet local codes. Homes equipped this way contain all necessary con- duits to the electrical distribution panel. However, the four feeder conductors (not provided with the home) are installed on site. If the masthead is located above the roof overhang, al- low a minimum clearance of eight feet above all roof points that the conductors pass over. There are two exceptions to this rule: (1) The vertical clearance may be reduced to three feet if the roof has a minimum slope of 4 in 12; and (2) The vertical clearance may be re- duced to 18 inches if no more than four feet of service -drop conductors pass above the roof overhang, and if they terminate at a through -the -roof raceway or approved support. A min- imum clearance must also be provided from the final grade to the service -drop conductors. This measurement may vary from 10 feet to 18 feet, depending on the types of traffic antic- ipated below the service drop (refer to the NEC). Unless impractical, locate service heads above the point of attachment of the service -drop conductors and make them rain -tight. If i ' // Grounding the electrical system. Do not provide electrical power until the grounding electrode is in- stalled and connected. When the meter base is not on the house never use the neutral conductor of the feeder cable as a ground wire. Do not ground the neutral bar in the electrical distribution panel. 1 / A Prior to energizing the home, turn off the water heater un- til it is completely filled with water. 10. individual conductors do not extend downward, form drip loops. • From below. A section of conduit is factory installed through the floor cavity. Install properly -sized service entrance conductors from the main power supply to the panel board. Depending on the location of the main panelboard inside the home. Refer to Table 26 for the conductor requirements. The installer must provide the supply connection including the four feeder conductors, junction box and conduit connectors. Protect conductors emerging from the ground from a minimum of 18 inches below grade to eight feet above grade, or to the point of entrance to the home. The distance measured from the top surface of a buried cable, conduit, or raceway to the finished grade must meet the minimum burial requirements outlined in the NEC. Use a moisture -proof bushing at the end of the conduit from which the buried cable emerges. METER MOUNTED ON HOME WITHIN 6 FEET OF CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL If the meter is mounted on the home, the following requirements apply (refer to Figure 65): • Use straps to support any conduit. Do not use the meter base equipment for support. • Use exterior equipment and enclosures listed as weatherproof and entrance conduc- tors listed for wet locations. • The grounding bar may be installed separate from the neutral bar for purposes of testing the electrical system. The grounding bar may be isolated during the electrical check and re -attached, after the tests are completed. Check with the local electrical utility to verify meter base requirements and locations and distances for the main panel and meter box. • The field installed meter base enclosure must be installed in accordance with its list- ing. Fasten securely to exterior wall studs and provide for a weather tight seal. • All field work must be done by a licensed electrician or other person approved by the LAHJ. • Check the local code for any requirements regarding the location of the meter base. Note that bonding, screws, straps, or buses in the distribution panel board or in appliances have been removed and discarded at the manufacturing facility. EQUIPMENT MAIN PANEL OVERHEAD SERVICE ENTRY GROUND ENCLOSURE CONDUIT TO BUS BAR NEUTRAL METER BY SERVICE HEAD BUS BAR UTILITY COMPANY BONDING STRAP --CONDUIT NOT INSTALLED NDUIT INSTALLED N.M. CONDUIT GROUNDING FACTORY UNDERGROUND t:�A7 LUG TO SERVICE ENTRY CHASSIS ---TO MAIN ---TO MAIN TO GROUNDING BLACK -"HOT' TO A OR B PANEL PANEL ROD RED -"HOT' TO A OR B WHITE TO NEUTRAL BUS BAR EXTERIOR WALL METER METER ENCLOSURE 1/4" AIR SPACE BETWEEN METER ENCLOSURE AND EXTERIOR WALL SIDE VIEW (TYP. ALL APPLICATIONS( 97 Figure 65. Meter base wiring when the meter is on the home within 6 feet of Circuit Breaker Panel. When a factory installed service meter base is provided on a home, a grounding elec- trode conductor and a ground wire must be installed according to the following specifi- cations: 1. Grounding wire material and size per Table 26 provided by the manufacturer. If manufacturer provides a minimum 1/2 inch EMT or conduit raceway, the wire is provided by the retailer for installation. 2. The clamp connecting the grounding wire to the electrode shall be suitable for direct burial and located flush or below ground level. 3. Use a 5/8 inch diameter by eight foot long iron electrode for grounding. Larger sizes may be required by LAHJ. 4. Drive the electrode to a depth of not less than eight feet so that at least eight feet of the electrode is in contact with the soil. 5. When rock is encountered, the electrode may be driven at an angle not to ex- ceed 45 degrees from vertical or buried in a trench that is at least 2-1/2 feet deep. TESTING After your home has been completely assembled and all accessories installed, it should be tested to ensure that no damage occurred during transit and that all electrical con- nections were properly performed (TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM pg. 111). These tests should be performed by qualified personnel familiar with the local codes and required test procedures. STEP 2. CONNECT WATER SERVICE CONNECTION To connect the home's water system to the water source, identify the water inlet locat- ed under the home (usually below the water heater compartment or utility room) and follow the procedure described below (refer to Figure 66): 1. Flush pipe. Flush field installed water piping free of all debris prior to connec- tion to the home's water inlet. 2. Clean threads. Ensure that pipe threads are clean. 3. Install pressure -reducing valve. If the local water supply exceeds 80 psi in- stall a pressure -reducing valve. 4. Connect valve. Install a main shut-off valve between the water supply source and the home in an accessible location underneath or adjacent to the home. Select a full flow gate or ball shutoff valve, or equivalent valve. To prevent the possibility of fresh water contamination, install an anti -siphon valve on all field installed exterior faucets. FACTORY INSTALLED WATER PIPE OPTIONAL HOSE BIB (NOT SUPPLIED) SERVICE CONNECTION LOCATE WATER RISER (NOT SUPPLIED) UNDERNEATH OR ADJACENT TO HOME I I MANDATORY SHUT-OFF VALVE (NOT SUPPLIED) M. Maximum water pressure. The water system for the home was designed for a maximum inlet pressure of 80 psi. Figure 66. Water system connection 5. Inspect water heater drip pan drainpipe. Inspect the drain opening on the water heater to ensure that it is clear of any obstruction. Drain pipe cannot con- nect with the DWV line. 6. Insulate. In areas subject to freezing temperatures, protect with insulation or heat tape pipes, valves and pressure reducers that are exposed to the outdoors; and pipes in water heater compartments with non -insulated doors. Connect heat tape to the electrical outlet under the home near the water supply inlet. Heat tape must not be installed on the DWV pipe. Electrical outlet provided under the home must only be used for the heat tape connection because it is GFCI protected. TESTING After connecting the water lines check the water system for leaks using one of the pro- cedures described below. Before testing, close all water faucets, spigots, and toilet - tank float valves. Hydrostatic (preferred): 1. Bypass water heater. Bypass the water heater by disconnecting the hot outlet and cold inlet water lines from the water heater and joining them together. This will protect the hot water tank from damage and protect those involved in the test from possible injury. 2. Pressurize system. Connect a hydrostatic pump, valve and gauge. Pressurize the system with water at 100 psi, and then isolate it from the pressure source. Bleed all air from the highest and farthest points in the system. Using check valves. Verify that a check valve has been installed on the water inlet to prevent water system drainage in the event of a loss of water pressure from the source. Such pressure loss could cause the water heater to drain, exposing the heating elements of electric water heaters causing them to fail. Figure 67. Water heater drip pan and drain Selecting heat tape. Use only pipe heating cable (tape) listed for manufac- tured homes and install it in accordance with the cable (tape) manufacturer instal- lation instructions. Testing water lines. Only . use pneumatic (air) testing when hydrostatic testing is not practical. Air under pressure is explosive. Ex- ercise extreme caution and notify all site personnel of the test. Wear protective eyewear and take precau- the system with water at 100 psi, and then isolate it from the pressure source. tions to prevent impact Bleed all air from the highest and farthest points in the system. damage to the system 3. Hold pressure. Monitor the pressure for at least 15 minutes. while the test is in progress. 4. Fix leaks. If the pressure drops below 100 psi, locate and correct any leaks by Do not pneumatically test cutting out and discarding bad pipe sections or joints and installing new pipe or CPVC systems. Pneumati- joints with couplings. cally test Flow Guard Gold 5. Repeat. Repeat the test until all leaks have been eliminated. systems only at low pres- sure levels (20 psi or less). 6. Restore connections. Reconnect the water heater and the water supply. Pressurizing water lines. When pressurizing the wa- ter system, connect the Pneumatic: pump to a location above a 1. Bypass water heater. Bypass the water heater by disconnecting the hot outlet closed shut-off valve so as and cold inlet water lines from the water heater and joining them together. This not to introduce pressure will protect the hot water tank from damage and protect those involved in the into the municipal water test from possible injury. supply. 2. Pressurize system. Connect an air pump and pressure gauge to the water in- let, pressurize the system to 100 psi and isolate the pressure source from the system. i � // 3. Hold pressure. Monitor the pressure for least 15 minutes. If the pressure drops below 1.00_psi,.locate.any leaks_by.applying soapy water.to.the connections and Anti -Scald Valves. Anti - looking for bubbles. Scald valves have been in- 4. Fix leaks. Correct any leaks by cutting out and discarding bad pipe sections or stalled on all tubs, joints and installing new pipe or joints with couplings. tub/showers and showers in 5. Retest. Repeat the procedure until all leaks have been eliminated. the home. The valves are 6. Restore connections. Reconnect the water heater and the water supply. preset by the valve manufac- turer to about 105°F (41 °C). FREEZE PROTECTION FOR UNOCCUPIED HOMES After the water lines havebeen flushed, the outlet tem- If the home is to be left unheated in cold weather. Protect water lines from freezing as perature at each tub, follows: tub/shower and shower must 1. Disconnect supply. Turn off the water supply and disconnect the water supply be tested to ensure that it inlet. does not exceed 120°F 2. Drain water heater. Turn off the water heater; if necessary, attach a hose to the (49°C). Water should run for valve to direct water away from under the home, open the drain valve and drain at least one minute on the hottest setting before taking the tank completely the temperature reading. 3. Drain faucets. Open all faucets throughout the home (including the laundry ar- Some customer's may desire ea if plumbed, and any exterior faucets) and let them drain completely. temperatures higher than 4. Drain toilets. Flush toilets and drain water tanks completely. 105°F (41 °C). Temperature 5. Close faucets. Close all water faucets with the exception of one. may be adjusted using the 6. Connect compressor. Connect a maximum of 30 psi air supply to the water in- instructions provided with the valve. In no case should the let connection using a low pressure.compressor. temperature exceed 120°F 7. Open faucets. With the air supply on the system, open one faucet at a time (49°C) as this may result in throughout the home. serious bodily harm and/or 8. Disconnect compressor. After the entire system has been drained of all water, death. disconnect the air supply and close the water inlet valve. 9. Pour anti -freeze. Pour an RV antifreeze solution into all drain traps, including sinks, tubs and toilets. Be sure that the antifreeze is safe for the fixtures and P- traps. STEP 3. CONNECT GAS SERVICE CONNECTION If the home uses natural or liquid petroleum gas (LPG, also known as propane) for wa- ter or space heating, cooking or other appliances, follow the procedure described be Installing gas lines. Only low: qualified professionals may 1. Inspect vents. Assure that all exhaust vents on gas -fired equipment are se- connect and test gas ser curely connected and that roof jacks and stacks have not come loose during vice. transit and they are properly installed. 2. Review appliance instructions. Review each appliance manufacturer's in- 100 structions before the home is connected to the gas supply. Most gas appli- ances are typically configured to operate on natural gas. If the gas supply will be LPG, consult the appliance manufacturer's instructions to determine what changes need to be made. For homes located above 3,000 feet, appliances may require a different orifice. 3. Remove cap. Remove the protective cap from home inlet pipe and install a full flow shut-off valve at the supply inlet (Figure 68). 4. Install regulator. The gas piping system is designed for a pressure that is at least seven inches of water column (4 oz. per sq in or 0.25 psi) but not more than 14 inches of water column (8 oz. per sq in or 0.5 psi). If gas from any supply source exceeds, or could exceed this pressure, install a regulator if re- quired by the LAHJ. 5. Connect supply. Using matching threaded fittings connect the gas supply to the inlet side of the shut-off valve. 6. Close valves. Close all valves at appliances prior to opening the main supply valve. Figure 68. Gas service con - FULL FLOW SHUTOFF nection VALVE REQUIRED #�DUST OR (SUPPLIED BY OTHERS OVER I UNION (SUPPLIED SOURCE BY OTHERS) OF GAS TESTING Test the gas piping system in the following two ways: 1) piping only and 2) entire sys- tem. Consult with the LAW for any additional testing or start-up requirements. Before testing begins, the temperature of the ambient air and the piping should be ap- proximately the same. Conduct the tests when and where air temperatures will remain constant. Piping only test (all appliances isolated) 1. Isolate appliances. Isolate all appliances from the system by closing all ap- pliance shut-off valves. 2. Attach gauge. Attach to the home's gas inlet a mercury manometer or slope gauge calibrated in increments of not more than 1/10 lb. 3. Pressurize system. Using an air compressor, pressurize the system with compressed air to three psi and isolate the pressure source from the system. 4. Monitor pressure. Monitor the pressure for at least 10 minutes. 5. Check for leaks. If pressure drops below three psi, check for leaks by apply- ing a non -corrosive, ammonia -free gas leak detection fluid to the joints at all valves, appliance connections and crossover connections (do not use dish washing detergents, soap or other household chemicals). If bubbles form, tighten the connection and recheck. 6. Repair leaks. If leaks persist, replace defective pipes or fittings with sound material and retest. 7. Release pressure. Release pressure and open all appliance shut-off valves. 8. Rinse connections. Thoroughly rinse all tested connections with water to remove leak detection fluid. Entire system test (with appliances) 1. Close appliances. Close all gas equipment controls and pilot light valves ac- cording to the individual gas equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Open valves. Assure that gas shut-off valves for all gas equipment are in the open position. 3. Attach gauge. Attach to the home's gas inlet a pressure gauge calibrated in ounces. 101 4. Pressurize system. Pressurize the system with compressed air to six to eight ounces (3/8 to 1/2 psi, or 10 to 14 inches of water column). 5. Check for leaks. Check for leaks as described above in step 5 of the Piping only test. Replace defective pipes or fittings with sound material and re -test. 6. Rinse connections. Thoroughly rinse all tested connections with water to remove leak detection fluid. GAS APPLIANCE START-UP Open the shut-off valve for each appliance and adjust the burners according to the ap- pliance manufacturer's instructions. Verify that the furnace and water heater thermo- stats are operating properly and set them to the desired temperatures. STEP 4. CONNECT OIL SERVICE Homes that are equipped with oil burning furnaces must have oil supply piping installed i // and tested on site by a qualified professional in accordance with NFPA 31, Standard • for the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment, 2001 or the requirements of the LAHJ, Fill gas water heaters. Be - whichever is more stringent. The home manufacturer does not supply oil piping or fore lighting the pilot on a tanks. gas powered water heater, OIL CONNECTION fill the tank -with water. Fail - Consult the furnace manufacturer's instructions for proper pipe sizing and installation ure to do so could damage the water heater. procedures. Where piping is run through the bottom of the home, ensure all holes in the bottom board are sealed tight with foam, mastic, and/or tape specially made for that purpose and made rodent proof. When equipping the home with an oil storage tank, comply with the following: • Install the pipe with a gradual slope toward the fill end or drain plug (if so equipped) to facilitate pumping or draining of water and sludge. • Provide a readily accessible approved manual shut-off valve at the outlet, in- stalled to close against the supply. • Equip the tank with an approved oil filter or strainer located downstream from the tank shut-off valve. Use a filter or strainer containing a sump with a drain to trap water. • Equip under ground tanks with a filler neck extending one foot above grade and a minimum 1-1/4 inch diameter vent pipe extending at least two feet above grade. • Locate the tank to be accessible for service and inspection, and safe from fire and other hazards. • If the tank is located inside a compartment of the home, provide ventilation at the bottom of the compartment to permit diffusion of vapors. If the tank is fixed to the home, provide for filling and draining from the outside. • Insulate interior tanks from the structural members of the home. Provide tanks so installed with an outside fill and vent pipe and an approved liquid level gauge. • Install tanks that feed vaporizing type oil furnaces so that oil flows by gravity. To achieve efficient gravity flow, make sure that the bottom of the tank is at least 18 inches above the furnace oil control level. ' V&**ZA • Tanks for gun type oil furnaces (these furnaces include a fuel pump) may be Testing oil tanks. All oil installed above or below ground. storage tank and piping in - OIL SYSTEM TESTING stallations and tests must Before operating the system, fill the tank to capacity with the fuel to be burned and vis- meet all applicable local reg- ually check all joints in the system for leakage. Replace (do not repair) parts that leak. ulations and should be made only by experienced, quali- fied personnel. 102 Prepare Appliances and Equipment This chapter provides instructions for installing and/or preparing appliances and other equipment. While the items below can be completed in any order, the last item, TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, must be done last. INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP (p. 103) VPREPARE HEATING SYSTEM (p. 104) INSTALL REMOTE HEATING•AND COOLING EQUIPMENT (p: 104) PREPARE WHOLE HOUSE VENTILATION SYSTEM (p.� 105) PREPARE CLOTHES DRYER (p'. 105) ,V • PREPARESMOKEALARMS (p. 106)= _ PREPARE FIREPLACES (p. 107) PREPAREXITCHEN AND BATH APPLIANCES % FIXTURES (p.•108). INSTALL EXTERIOR LIGHTING ('p. 109) _INSTALL CEILING FANS AND LIGHTING (pi 109) V' ` TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP (if applicable) CENTRAL UNITS IF i // Install split system or unitary central air conditioners and/or heat pumps as follows: • 1. Check suitability. Check the home's Comfort Cooling Certificate (may be in- Use listed appliances. All cluded with the data plate) to confirm that the home is suitable for installation of applicable appliances must central air. If so, note the air distribution system's rated duct capacity (BTU/hr), be listed or certified by a any equipment sizing guidance provided by the manufacturer and information nationally recognized test - provided to calculate the home's heat gain. ing agency for the applica- 2. Select equipment. Select equipment with a rated heating capacity (BTU/hr) not tion for which the unit is in - exceeding the maximum indicated on the home's data plate and a rated cooling tended and installed in ac- capacity sized in accordance with Chapter 28 of the 1997 ASHRAE Handbook of cordance with the terms of Fundamentals or ACCA Manual J, Residential Cooling Load, 8th edition. Informa- its listing or certification. tion necessary to calculate the heat gain of the home is located on the Data Plate. Properly sizing equipment. Sizing recommendations may also be obtained by utilizing the Manufactured Oversized cooling equip - Housing Research Alliance Cooling Equipment Sizing Guidelines available at ment can lower energy ef- www.mhrahome.org (Located in Appendix B). Choose equipment with a mini- ficiency, reduce comfort, mum circuit amperage (found on the equipment rating plate) no greater than the shorten equipment life and branch circuit rating of the exterior air conditioning receptacle (indicated on the may cause moisture prob- adjacent tag), if present. lems in the home (includ- 3. Install A -coil. When installing a cooling A -coil in a down -flow furnace that incor- ing potentially damaging porates a fresh air intake duct, position the duct in the furnace cavity according to the home's structure). Siz- the furnace manufacturer's instructions (Figure 69). For electric down -flow fur- ing guidance is provided by naces, trim the whole house ventilation duct as needed to allow installation of the the Manufactured Housing A -coil and secure the duct to the wall of the compartment or to the top of the A- Research Alliance Cooling coil. Do not restrict the flex duct opening, allow the duct insulation to contact the Equipment Sizing Guide - A -coil, or allow the duct to become kinked, restricted or configured to form a trap. lines available at www.mhrahome.org. 103 "WHOLE HOUSE" ENTILATIO 'LEX DUCT FURNACE CABINET "WHOLE HOUSE"—," VENTILATION FLEX DUCT FURNACE CABINET FURNACE 4. Connect to Power. Connect cooling equipment to the power supply in accord- ance with all manufacturer's instructions and local codes. 5. Direct Runoff. Direct condensate runoff from cooling equipment away from the home and so that it does not collect under the home. PREPARE HEATING SYSTEM If the home does not contain a factory installed heating appliance, install a remote heating appliance according to INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT, p. 104. Prepare fuel -burning heating systems included with the home as follows: 1. Inspect for damage. Inspect the furnace and report any damage to the home manufacturer. 2. High altitude. If the home is located more than 2,000 feet above sea level or as indicated in the furnace manufacturer's instructions, derate gas furnaces 4% for each 1,000 feet above sea level. This work must be done by a qualified (and in some jurisdictions, licensed) technician. 3. Convert for LP gas. If LP gas (propane) will be used, convert the appliance from natural gas to LP gas use. Conversion must be made by a qualified and (if re- quired by the LAHJ) licensed technician. 4. Install intake air pipe. Consult the appliance manufacturer's instructions for max- imum allowable pipe run length, requirements for air dampers, locations relative to expected snow levels (check with the LAHJ for expected snow levels), acceptable materials, pipe supports, and pipe termination requirements. 5. Install flue. For combustion appliances, install the flue roof cap and stack as- sembly as described in the manufacturer's installation instructions. INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT Install remote units in compliance with all heating and cooling equipment requirements in this chapter above and the following: 1. Locate connections to the home. Find the manufacturer -installed connectors, labels or tags under the home indicating the required connection points for supply and return air. If connectors are not provided nor location indicated, select a sup- ply duct location such that there are approximately equal numbers of supply regis- ters forward and rear of the connection point. It is recommended that the exterior heating and/or cooling equipment be centrally located on the back side of the home. 2. Install ducts. Install the appropriate supply and return ducts (not provided) be- tween the remote unit and the home (Figure 71), making connections according to the instructions for crossover ducts in Connect Crossovers (p. 61). 3. Install dampers. If installing a remote cooling unit in a home with a factory in- stalled furnace, install dampers between the furnace and the home's air duct sys- tem, and between the remote unit and the home's air duct system to prevent warm air in heating mode from escaping to the remote cooling unit and vice versa. 4. Connect wiring. Install a thermostat containing a fan switch. Connect utilities in accordance with all manufacturer's instructions and local codes. Wiring shall be 104 Figure 69. Whole house ventilation flex duct in an electric down -flow furnace. From left to right.' as pre- pared in the factory,• proper installation with A -coil, im- proper installation with A -coil Selecting A -coils. Use only A -coil units compatible and listed for use with the fur- nace in the home and in- stalled in accordance with the furnace manufacturer's instructions. Installing flue stacks with a hinged roof. If flue stack components are installed above the finish roof line (as is often the case with hinged roofs), an Alterna- tive Construction letter is normally required along with a follow-up inspection. Contact the factory for guidance. Venting appliances to the outside. Vent to the exte- rior of the home all com- bustion appliances except ranges and ovens. Selecting ducts. Exterior ductwork for remote units must be provided by the installer or HVAC contrac- tor. Ducts must be ap- proved for exterior installa- tion and should be wrapped with insulation of at least R-8 under a vapor barrier with a perm rating of not greater than one. (For ENERGY STAR homes, the R-value must be at least that specified on the manufacturer's EN- ERGY STAR Site Installa- tion Checklist— a minimum of R-8.) per the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer. 5. Seal penetrations. Repair or replace all floor insulation disturbed during the duct installation and seal holes in the bottom board using foam, mastic or tape special- ly made for that purpose. AIR CONDITIONING OR HEATING EQUIPMENT MARRIAGE SUPPLY RETURN SUPPLY DUCT LINE DUCT DUCT SUPPORT BLOCK SUPPORT STRAPS AT INIMUM CLEARANCE 48' IN. O.C. BETWEEN DUCTS AND MINIMUM GROUND TO BE 4 IN. PREPARE WHOLE HOUSE VENTILATION SYSTEM Prepare the whole -house ventilation system according to the ventilation system manufac- turer's instructions. Confirm that any fresh air intake ducts extend to the exterior and do not draw air from the crawlspace under the home. Do not allow any fresh air ventilation intake ducts to become kinked or restricted, forming a trap. PREPARE CLOTHES DRYER DRYER VENTS If the home has been designed with a dryer location, the components for ventilating the dry- er should already be installed so that the vent terminates to the exterior of the home. In the event the dryer ventilation system could not be completed by the manufacturer, the compo- nents to complete the ventilation system are included in the home and should be completed as illustrated before connecting and operating the dryer. Run the dryer vent to the outside through the exterior wall or through the floor to a point beyond the perimeter of the home, using materials approved by the clothes dryer manufac- turer (see Figure 72). EXTERIOR CLAMP TO WALL DRYER Cep CONNECTION TO VENT SEAL CAP BOTTOM DRYER BOARD VENT SUPPORT STRAP CAP RIGID OR FLEX DUCT WOOD FRAME SECURED TO BOTTOM OF RIMPLATE OR INSTALL THROUGH SKIRTING VENT BELOW FLOOR Install the vent as follows: CLAMP RIGID OR TO VENT FLEX DUCT CAP CLAMP TO DRYER CONNECTION VENT THROUGH EXTERIOR WALL 1. Remove temporary caps. Remove any temporary seals and duct caps from the vent rough openings. 2. Install ductwork. Install ductwork using clamps (do not use screws or other fas- teners that penetrate into the duct) and support the duct with metal straps con- nected to the floor joists or chassis at two feet o.c. or less. Ensure duct connec- tions are internally overlapped to prevent inhibiting the flow of air and thereby causing lint accumulation. Figure 71. Ducts connecting exterior heating and/or cool- ing equipment to the home VA ;dyzrz Compressed Duct. Support the duct without compress- ing the insulation and re- stricting airflow. ZZ Choosing pipe lengths. The appliance manufactur- er may designate the length of the pipe run based on the pipe diameter and the number of turns in the pipe run. Venting exhaust systems. Exhaust vents must extend to the home's exterior through skirting. Termina- tion of the dryer exhaust underneath the home can cause condensation and moisture damage to the home. Lint and dust accu- mulation can ignite, caus- ing a fire. Figure 72. Clothes dryer ventilation ductwork through floor (left) or exterior wall (right) Avoid damaging structural elements. Do not cut or otherwise damage struc- tural elements such as floor joists or wall studs for the installation of the dryer exhaust system. 105 3. Install cap and damper. Install an approved dryer vent cap with damper on the exterior termination of the duct. If the vent terminates at skirting, secure the cap to framing or skirting with sheet metal screws and seal edges with caulk or sealant. If the vent terminates through a wall, apply a bead of sealant to the back of the cap around the opening and secure with sheet metal screws to metal, hardboard or fiber cement siding or with wood screws to a mount block for vinyl siding. 4. Seal opening. Seal openings inside and outside of the home including at the floor, interior walls, siding and skirting (with caulk) and at the bottom board using foam, mastic and/or tape specially made for that purpose. GAS DRYERS If the home was not fitted for a gas dryer, installing one requires substantial alteration to the home. Gas supply piping and adequate venting must be provided as specified by the dryer manufacturer and installed by a trained professional. Do not cut major structural ele- ments to accommodate a gas dryer. PREPARE SMOKE ALARMS The home has several factory installed smoke alarms that are wired to a 120 volt circuit. If the home was designed for placement on a basement, an additional alarm is provided for installation at a pre -wired location under the home. Connect the basement smoke alarm and test all alarms as follows: 1. Check circuit. Ensure that the batteries are installed and the electrical power to the home is activated and that the smoke alarm circuit is on. 2. Test alarms. Press the "test" button on the alarm and hold for 5 seconds (or until the alarm sounds). When the alarm begins to sound, release and confirm that each alarm in the home is sounding. Replace (with the same brand as those in- stalled elsewhere in the home) any alarms that do not sound and retest. 3. Disconnect AC. With the AC current disconnected and batteries installed, test for DC operation following the same procedure as shown in step 1. Both steps 1 and 2 above must be conducted on each alarm installed in the home. If any alarm fails to sound during the test, turn off the power at the main panel box and check the wiring. Make any necessary repairs and conduct a complete re -test. Repeat if necessary until all alarms are functioning properly. Ele Gas. Ventilation compo- nents that may be included with the home for an elec- tric dryer may not be ac- ceptable for gas dryers. Consult the gas dryer manufacturer instructions. Installing ducts. Keep ductwork straight and smooth as possible without excess slack. Slope it slightly downward towards the exterior to facilitate moisture drainage. PREPARE FIREPLACES Install chimneys, chimney flashing and roofing, fireplace combustion air inlets and hearths according to the manufacturer's instructions and the procedures described below. CHIMNEYS Fireplace and wood stoves may require on -site installation of additional sections of ap- proved chimney pipe, a spark arrestor and a rain cap assembly. Follow the manufacturer's instructions and the procedures described below: 1. Remove coverings. Remove protective materials covering the roof flashing and any foreign material from the installed part of the chimney. 2. Install chimney pipe. Assemble and seal the chimney per the fireplace or wood stove manufacturer's installation instructions and if there is a conflict between the instructions and the figure, follow the instructions. To assure sufficient draft for proper operation, extend the chimney at least three feet above the highest point where it penetrates the roof and at least two feet higher than any surface within 10 feet of the chimney (Figure 73). Use additional section(s) of chimney pipe (not provided) if required by local code or if the site has obstructions within 10 feet of the chimney. Fireplaces and wood stoves not provided by the home manufacturer, including chimneys and air inlets for fireplaces and wood stoves must be listed for use with manufactured homes and must be installed in accordance with their listings. ROOFTOP Figure 73. Chimney and ASSEMBLY RAIN CAP combustion air intake duct �SPARK ARRESTOR installation CHIMNEY CAP ADAPTOR MIN. DOUBLE WALL PIPE ROOF STORM COLLAR ,. / /� HEIGHT FLASHING Selecting the appropriate FIRESTOP THIMBLE flue. Wood fireplaces use larger diameter flues than gas fireplaces. Make sure DAMPER flue matches the appliance HANDLE type. Gas fireplaces cannot burn wood because the CLOSED OPEN flue is too small and smoke r r will back up into the home. r r R INLET DIAMPER SNOW AIR INTAKE FROM OUTSIDE AIR INLET Figure 74. Chimney clear- ance LESS ,f THAN 1n' I 3. Install shingles. Install shingles up to the edge of the flue cut-out in the roof 107 deck. Secure shingles installed under the roof flashing with asphalt cement. 4. Install flashing. Place flashing over pipe section and shingles and set in asphalt cement. Secure flashing to roof deck at top two corners with roofing nails. 5. Complete shingles. Cut shingles in successive courses to fit around the pipe and embed them in asphalt cement where they overlap the flashing. Secure shingles with roofing nails through flashing and apply asphalt cement over nail heads. The completed installation should appear as shown in Figure 75, with the lower part of the flange overlapping the lower shingles and the side and upper shingles over- lapping the flange. PUSH Dr"""' STORM COLLAR FLANGE ROOF SHINGLES FLANGE UPPER AND SIDE CAULKING SHINGLES OVERLAP FLANGE AND ARE SET IN ASPHALT CEMENT FLASHING FLUE PIPE LOWER PART OF FLANGE OVERLAPS LOWER SHINGLE COMBUSTION AIR INLETS Combustion air inlets provide combustion air through the floor or an exterior wall to a com- bustion appliance. If installed through an exterior wall, no further site installation is re- quired. If through the floor, extend the duct from its point just below the floor to the outside. Locate the outside air inlet above expected snow levels (contact the LAHJ for snow levels). Follow the fireplace manufacturer's instructions (typically in the fireplace/stove or with the chimney parts). PREPARE KITCHEN AND BATH APPLIANCES / FIXTURES Install kitchen and bath appliances according to the manufacturer's instructions and the procedures described for each appliance below. COOKING APPLIANCES If the home is provided with a range, cook top and/or grill containing its own exhaust sys- tem that penetrates the floor, complete the exhaust system as follows: 1. Remove covers. Remove the cover on the factory installed exhaust pipe protrud- ing from beneath the floor near the appliance. 2. Install termination fitting. Secure the provided termination fitting at the outside edge of the floor. 3. Install duct. Use the provided flexible metallic duct to connect the elbow protrud- ing from the floor and the termination fitting. Refer to the manufacturer's installa- tion instructions for guidance on supporting the duct and making the connections. SITE -INSTALLED GAS APPLIANCES Install only appliances with a Btu capacity equivalent to or less than the capacity of the fac- tory -Installed piping and at the location of a factory -installed gas riser. REFRIGERATOR Prepare the refrigerator as follows: • Remove straps, blocks or other securement devices used for shipping and patch any resulting marks on floors or walls. • If the refrigerator has an icemaker, check water lines for leaks upon installation and a few days later to make sure no leaks have developed. Figure 75. Roof flashing and shingle installation around chimney Installing exhaust ducts. Route exhaust ducts so they do not terminate be- neath the home. SITE -INSTALLED APPLIANCES AND FIXTURES If sinks, tubs, showers or other fixtures or appliances are to be site -installed, follow the manufacturer's installation instructions. Use only products listed for use in manufactured homes and follow all applicable local codes. INSTALL EXTERIOR LIGHTING Install exterior lighting according to Figure 76 and the following: 1. Remove cover. Remove the screws and cover from electrical junction box. 2. Install flash ring. Place the non-combustible flash ring over the junction box. 3. Connect wires. Connect fixture wires to house wires in the box, black to black, white to white and equipment ground to equipment ground, using listed wire con- nectors. Push wires into the box. 4. Connect fixtures. Connect the fixture to the junction box or strap using screws provided with the light fixture. 5. Weatherproof. Weatherproof/caulk around the base of the fixture, leaving a sma gap in the caulking on the bottom to permit drainage of water that may accumu- late. 6. Complete installation. Install bulb and globe on the fixture and verify proper op- eration. WIRE FROM SWITCH - NON -COMBUSTIBLE RING WIRE NUT WIRE FROW11 RE NUT (IF REQUIRED) (TYPICAL) SWITCHPICAL) FIXTURE CANOPY (1 GLOBE uPIGTAIL FORYBOX- WIRETOUNCTION GROUND CONTINUITY OTHER FIXTURE - INSTALL CEILING FANS/LIGHTS Install ceiling fans no closer than 36 inches, measured from the tip of the fan blade to the nearest side of the smoke alarm and with the trailing edges of the blades at least six feet - four inches above the finished floor. Comply with all unit manufacturer's instructions and the requirements below. CEILING FAN/LIGHT MOUNTED TO FACTORY INSTALLED ELECTRICAL BOX IN CEILING Before installing the unit, make sure that adequate structural bracing is present in the ceil- ing. If uncertain, check with the manufacturer. Follow the fan or light manufacturer's in- structions to connect the unit and complete the wiring. If the instructions are not available, connect the wiring as shown in Figure 77. 109 rr Lighting installation. A qualified electrician should install lighting. Before con- necting lighting, disconnect power to the lighting circuit. Ground all exterior light fix- tures. Using a non-combustible ring. Install a non- combustible ring complete- ly covering any combusti- ble surfaces the fixtures may be mounted on (e.g. hard -board, clad wood and vinyl siding), or when ceil- ing material is exposed be- tween the light fixture ca- nopy and the junction box. Figure 76. Exterior lighting connection V&0zz Installing ceiling fans. A qualified electrician should install lighting and fans. Before connecting the ceil- ing fan or light, disconnect power to the fan wires. Any unit installed outside of the home (such as in a porch ceiling) shall be listed for wet locations. GROUND WIRE Figure 77. Wiring for a ceil- ing fan or chain -hung light COLOR fixture with a maximum CODED weight of 35 /bs WIRES ROUND WIRE NUT STRAP CEILING BOX ,CEILING LIMITED OR � �'" MOUNTING NONCOMBUSTIBLE SCREW RING (IF REQUIRED) CHAIN CEILING FAN/LIGHT MOUNTED ON SITE -INSTALLED DECORATIVE BEAM Where the electrical box will be mounted in a site -installed decorative center beam at- tached to the ridge beam, connect the fixture as follows (see Figure 78): i t z/ A 1. Cut hole. If the decorative beam (shipped loose) does not contain a precut hole for the electrical box, cut a hole with a diameter approximately 1/4 inch larger than Choosing ceiling fan junc- the box's using a hole saw. Align the hole with the supply wire location and center tion boxes. Connect ceil- ing fans only to junction on the beam. boxes listed and marked 2. Install box. Install the box in the hole and secure the flange (plastic boxes only) for ceiling fan application in to the decorative beam with four #6 x 1" screws. accordance with Article 3. Insert wire. Insert the ceiling wire through a knock out hole in the side of the elec- 314.27(b) of 2005 NEC. trical box. It may be necessary to cut a notch in the top of the decorative beam Always ground metal junc- (on the supply wire side of the center beam hole) allowing the supply wire to be tion boxes. inserted into the electrical box without binding against the beam during installa- Selecting fan weight. Do tion. Leave approximately four inches of wire free in the box. not use any ceiling fans or 4. Attach beam. Secure the decorative beam in place over the center line joint, light fixtures that exceed checking that the supply wire is not pinched or penetrated by beam fasteners. Se- the weight rating of the box cure the electrical box to the ridge beam with #8 x 2 1/2" wood screws through the (35 Ibs unless otherwise two holes in the top of the box. noted). 5. Strip wires. Strip about 3/4 inch of insulation from the white and black conductor Grounding electrical de - ends of the supply wire. vices. Ground fans/lights 6. Position ring. Position the non-combustible flash rin g (provided) over the elec- using a fixture -grounding trical box so that the finished surface (adjacent to electrical box), which is to be device or a fixture- covered by the fan canopy, is not exposed. grounding wire as specified 7. Install and wire unit. Follow the unit manufacturer's installation instructions for in the manufacturer's in- structions. mounting the fan/light assembly to the box and for electrical wiring. Use provided electrical connectors for splicing wire. Figure 78. Ceiling fan/light mounted to flush ridge beam RIDGE BEAM SUPPLY WIRE COILEI AND SECURED FOR SHIPMENT NOTCH BEAM AT HOLE IF NECESSARY FOR WIRE CHASE — SECURE BOX TO 2X6 2X6 CENTER BEAM - SHIPPED LOOSE FOR FIELD INSTALLATION HOLE FOR BOX CUT THROUGH 2X6 (MAY BE CUT IN PLANT OR IN FIELD) SECURE BOX TO RIDGE BEAM (FIELD INSTALLED) ELECTRICAL BOX Y WIRE INSERTED IN FIELD JGH SIDE KNOCKOUT OF BOX 10 { TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM After completion of all electrical wiring and connections, including crossovers, appliances, lights, and ceiling fans, inspect and test the electrical system as follows: ` 1. Fill water heater. Fill water heater before turning on power to the home or switch- ing on the circuit breaker. 2. Test continuity. Before turning on the electrical power to the home, conduct an 0 electrical continuity test to ensure that exposed metallic parts of the home and the chassis are effectively bonded. 3. Test operation. After turning on the electrical power to the home, conduct opera- tional tests of all devices to demonstrate that they are connected and in working order. 4. Test polarity. After turning on the electrical power to the home, conduct electrical polarity checks to determine that connections of electrical equipment installed or completed during installation have been made properly. Visual verification is an acceptable electrical polarity check for these on -site connections. 111 Complete Exterior Work This chapter covers sealing the bottom board, installing the ground cover and skirting, preparing wind protection shutters and completing site built structures. ! V' STEP 1. REPAIR -AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD (p.' 112) STEP 2: INSTALL`GROOND MOISTURE RETARDER (' r p `112), i r '.STEP 3IN$TALC`SKIRTING (p+ 113) ' STEP 4. ASSEMBLE OPTIONAL WIND PROTECTION S ' UTTERS (p114), }'V STEP 5 COMPLETE SITE. BUILT STRUCTURES (p. 114) STEP 1. REPAIR AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD Tears and openings in'the bottom board can result from transportation or installation i // activities. Inspect for holes and gaps in the entire bottom board, especially areas around service penetrations, crossover connections, pipe and duct hangers, foundation elements and the perimeter of the floor. Using approved materials appropriate for the Sealing bottom boards. A type of repair, repair the bottom board wherever torn or loosened as follows: continuous and sealed bot- 1. Insulate. Replace any missing insulation prior to closure and repair of the bot- tom board is critical for home performance, energy tom board, paying particular attention to insulation gaps that may have been efficiency, protection created at P-traps. against moisture problems, 2. Repair large openings. Repair large openings with a durable patch made of prevention of pipe freezing bottom board fabric or other compatible material and fastened with vinyl bot- and protection against in - tom board tape held in place by fasteners installed with a divergent stapler. sects and rodents Seal the edges around patches with foam or mastic. For large openings, in- Bottom board sealing me - stall a rigid backer board behind the bottom board to provide a fastening sub- thods. Tapes shall never strate for the patch. be used alone to repair a 3. Repair small openings. Repair small gaps and tears with vinyl bottom board large opening in the bottom tape, patches, adhesive/mastic or foam sealant. board. Divergent staples or Alternate materials may be used to repair and seal the bottom board provided they are mastic must be used in appropriate for the type of repair and installed per the manufacturer's installation in- tandem with tape to prevent structions. future tear off. Fastening vinyl siding. Do STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER not install fasteners directly If the space under the home is to be enclosed with skirting or other materials, a ground into vinyl siding. Allow for moisture retarder of a minimum six mil thick polyethylene sheeting or equivalent must siding thermal expansion be installed covering the ground under the home. Moisture retarders are not required in by pre -drilling minimum 1/2 and regions (less than 15 inches of rainfall annually) with dry soil conditions. If on- inch diameter fastener grade (surface) footings are used, install the ground moisture retarder prior to placing holes or fastening skirting the footings, or install it around the footings after all other work under the home is com- to a ledger under the home plete. (see Best Practice tip). Install the ground moisture retarder as follows: 1. Apply sheeting. Unroll the ground moisture overlapping joints in the sheeting a minimum of 12 inches and covering the entire area under the home except for areas under recessed entries, decks and porches. 2. Repair tears. Repair any large voids or tears in the retarder by patching with like material, maintaining a minimum 12 inch overlap, secured with tape or ad- hesive. Repair small voids and tears with tape, adhesive or per manufacturer's installation instructions. /I 112 STEP 3. SKIRTING (IF USED) Attaching vinyl skirting. At - Skirting is any structural or non-structural perimeter crawlspace enclosure. Complete tach skirting to the home, site built structures (see STEP 6. COMPLETE SITE BUILT STRUCTURES, p.114) that but allow for contraction abut the home (such as porches, attached garages and steps) prior to installing skirt- and expansion characteris- ing. tics of the skirting material. TABLE 27. SKIRTING AND VENTILATION SPECIFICATIONS Component Specification Skirting must be of weather -resistant materials or provided with protection against weather deterioration at least equivalent to that provided by a coat - Skirting ing of zinc on steel of not less than 0.30 oz per sq ft of surface coated. Skirting made from wood or wood products and used within six inches of the ground need to be made of materials naturally resistant to decay and termite infestation or pressure treated. Ventilation openings must be covered for their -full height and Width with a perforated (1/4 inch maximum,'opening in, any dimension) corrosion and Vents weather resistant covering that is ,designed,to prevent the entry of rodents. In areas subject to freezing;; the coverings for the ventilation openings must have -an operable damper, permitting them to be iri the.open or closed posi- ' tion depending on the weather. To design and install skirting, comply with the skirting manufacturer's instructions (if provided) and the following: 1. Configure skirting. Run the skirting along the perimeter of the home's heat- ed, conditioned space. Do not enclose with skirting areas under recessed en- tries, porches or decks (whether constructed as part of the home or added on site) unless skirting is of the fully vented type and installed so as to allow wa- ter to freely flow out from under the home. 2. Fasten skirting. Attach it to the home in a manner that prevents water from being trapped between the siding or trim and the skirting. Allow for frost heave when installing skirting in areas subject to frost. 3. Provide ventilation. Unless the skirting has integral ventilation openings that meet the following ventilation requirements, install equally sized ventilation openings on at least two opposite sides of the foundation. Size ventilation ar- ea to equal at least one square foot for each 150 square feet of under -floor area (or for each 1,500 square feet if a ground moisture retarder is installed . according to STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER, p. 112). The ventilation area must be the net free area of the foundation vent, not the area of the foundation opening. Place vents as high above the ground as practical. TABLE 29 FOUNDATION' VENTILATION, One Square Foot of Vent per_150 Square Feet. of Under -Floor Area Total Home Sq. Feet Sq. Feet of Vents Required Total Home Sq. Feet Sq. Feet of Vents 'Required Total Home _ Sq. Feet so. Feet of Vents 'Reguir"ed, f Total. Home : Sq. Feet . Sq. Feet, of Vents Required Total Home Sq. Feet, Sq. Feet of Vents Required Soo 3.33 1000 6.67 1500 10.00 2000 13.33 2500 16.67 600 4.00 1100 7.33 1600 10,67 2100. 14.00 2600 17.33' 700 4.67 1200 8.00 1700 11.33 2200 14.67 2700 18.00 800 5.33 1300 8.67 1800, . 12.00 2300 15.33 2806 18.67 900 6.00 1400 9.33 1900 12.67 2400 16.00 2900 19.33 4. Install access. Provide an access opening not less than 18 inches wide and 24 inches high (minimum 3 square feet in area) and located so that any utility connections located under the home are accessible. 5. Extend vents, drains and inlets. Run appliance exhaust vents, combustion air inlets and air conditioner condensation drains through the skirting to the outside and terminate each as instructed in the sections of this manual corre- 113 i // Avoid backfilling against skirting. Do not backfill against non-structural skirt- ing. sponding to each appliance. STEP 4. ASSEMBLE OPTIONAL WIND PROTECTION SHUT- TERS If desired, prepare temporary protective window covers for use during severe wind storms and hurricanes according to Appendix C. STEP 5. COMPLETE SITE BUILT STRUCTURES Install site built structures such as steps, landings, garages, awnings, carports, breezeways, porches, decks, railings, sheds and utility rooms according to manufac- turer's instructions (if any), in compliance with all local regulations including fire separa- tion and electrical requirements, and according to the following: • Do not obstruct any of the egress windows or the two required exit doors from the home. • The addition must be entirely self -supported and cannot rely on the home for support (superficial connections are acceptable). The home's structural system is not designed to support the extra loads imposed by the addition. • Do not damage the integrity of the home's structural or weatherproofing sys- tem. Seal any weatherproofing connections between the site built structure and the home.and flash_any roof.connections. • The home's structural system may not be cut or altered in any way. A regis- tered engineer or architect shall approve any alterations or changes. • Utilize only GFCI outlets for site built structures. • Install and test smoke alarms in any site built structures according to local code. • All joints between the home and the addition must be properly sealed so they are watertight. • The home's mechanical system has been designed for the home itself and does not consider the heating or cooling of the addition. • The addition must meet all local codes, including site work and fire separation requirements. The manufacturer does not accept any responsibility for the ad- dition's design. • The home with an addition must be in conformance with the HUD Manufac- tured Housing Code, such as exiting, light and vent, etc. The addition must be approved by the jurisdiction having authority. • Site work shall be consistent with the objectives of site grading as described in Prepare the Site (p.15). • The manufacturer will not honor the warranty for any problem that relates to the construction of the addition (leak problems, etc). A dormer roof can be installed on the home to match the pitch of the addition's roof. The shingles below the dormer must be removed and the dormer must be vented properly. The dormer weight, including the weight of the existing home's roof sheathing, shall be no more than 8 psf and distributed uniformly over the roof trusses of the home. Connec- tions may be made to attach the dormer to the home, but not be used to support the roof loads of the addition. The dormer shall be shingled, flashed and sealed properly to pre- vent leaks (follow shingle manufacturer's instructions and ARMA guidelines for shingle valley applications). The manufacturer is providing the above information as an accommodation only and without consideration. Accordingly, by this letter the manufacturer extends no warranties or representation either expressed or implied with regard to the recommendations here- in. 114 Prepare Home for Occupancy Follow these steps for final inspection and completion of the home. STEPA VERIFY ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION (A/C) INSPECTION (p. 115) STEP 2. COMPLETE INSPECTION CHECKLIST (p. 115) V, STEP 3. COMPLETE ENERGY&TAR CHECKLIST (p. 115) " STEP 4. CLEAN THEEHOME (p. 115) STEP 1. VERIFY ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION (AX) IN- SPECTION A home designated as an AC home will contain the letters "AC" in the serial number lo- cated on the data plate. Verifiying the AC inspection is the responsibility of the retailer. The installation is not complete until the alternative construction inspection has been passed and all applicable documention completed and returned to the plant. STEP 2. COMPLETE INSPECTION CHECKLIST After all previous steps have been accomplished, inspect the home to verify that it has been completely and properly installed using the checklist starting on p. 116. Installer must also certify that the installation is in compliance with either the manufacturer's in- structions or with an alternative design in compliance with 3285.2(c). Arrange for an in- spection by the appropriate LAHJ, if required. Correct any deficiencies found, if possible, or if not possible, inform the retailer or man- ufacturer immediately. STEP 3. COMPLETE ENERGY STAR CHECKLIST For ENERGY STAR qualified homes (check with the retailer or manufacturer), this step is to be completed by the manufacturer's designated representative. The manufacturer's representative must complete the Energy Star Site Installation Checklist, obtain signatures on the ENERGY STAR label, and return the completed ENERGY STAR Site Installation Checklist to the manufacturing plant. STEP 4. CLEAN THE HOME Remove and properly dispose of all installation -generated dust, debris and packaging materials from the home and the surrounding property. Ensure that the home is in "move -in" condition. 115 FOUNDATION SUPPORT • Footings properly sized and constructed for the soil conditions Pier spacing per data plate and applicable table and roof load zone Piers properly constructed and vertical Perimeter blocking installed (if required) Piers at each side of openings 48" or larger • Piers beneath all outside exterior doors (except when located in end wall) Center line piers installed at columns Shims in place and tight ANCHORS Approved anchors are used Proper anchors installed based on soil conditions Anchors are installed at correct angles Anchor spacing and installation correct Longitudinal ties installed (if required) Anchor straps are tensioned UNDER THE HOME Moisture retarder installed • The ground under and around the home has been properly graded to prevent water from collecting or flowing beneath the home • HVAC ducts are supported off the ground and connected tightly to collars at all ends Fireplace combustion air intake free and unrestricted No holes or tears in bottom board • Skirting (if used) has been installed per manufacturer's instructions with proper venting and provision for frost heave • Skirting has been attached in a manner that does not cause water to be trapped between the siding and trim and cannot be forced up into the wall cavi- ty Dryer vent, range/cook top exhaust, water heater temperature and pressure overflow pipe and AC condensate drain installed to perimeter of crawl space EXTERIOR Shingled roofs are free of visible damage and serious defects and there are no missing or loose shingles Shingle close-up and ridge cap have been completed per applicable details All hold down straps on shingled roofs have been removed and holes have been properly sealed • Penetrations at roof stacks, vents and chimneys have been properly sealed Siding and trim is free of gaps, voids, missing fasteners, damage and serious defects. All seams are sealed and hardboard edges are sealed. • Drip edge and fascia is properly installed and free of damage and serious de- fects • Gutters and downspouts are installed properly such that water is diverted away from the home Trees and bushes have been trimmed to prevent brushing against the home in windy conditions or under snow loads The HUD label is exposed, intact and legible The exterior of the home and immediate surroundings is clean, clear of con- 116 struction materials, dust and debris INTERIOR • Ceilings, walls and floor coverings are free from damage and serious defects • Carpeting is properly stretched and seamed • All trim and molding is installed properly and free of damage and defects • All cabinets, countertops, plumbing fixtures, appliances, furnishings and win- dow coverings are free of damage or serious defects • All cabinet doors and drawers work properly • All interior and exterior doors and windows open, close and latch properly • One window in each bedroom meets emergency egress requirements, has op- erating instruction labels on it and operates properly • All temporary shipping hardware has been removed • Floors are level • The data plate is intact and legible • Smoke alarms have been tested • The interior of the home is clean, clear of materials, dust and debris WATER AND DRAIN SYSTEMS Crossover and service connection and splices have been properly made with correct materials • Water and drain lines are insulated or otherwise protected from freezing • Pipe supports are installed and properly spaced • Proper slope has been maintained on all drain lines • All necessary inspections and tests have been performed • All sinks, basins, tubs and toilets operate properly • All hot and cold water lines are properly connected to fixtures, dispense water as labeled and operate properly • Tub, tub/shower and shower outlets have been verified to ensure the outlet water temperature does not exceed 120°F (49°C) ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS • The panel amperage matches the connection to the home • The home has been properly grounded • The main power supply has been properly connected and tested by a licensed electrician • Continuity test has been conducted • Polarity test has been conducted • Operational test has been conducted • All electrical crossovers have been connected • All receptacles, switches and light fixtures operate properly • Ground fault circuit interrupters operate properly • All exterior lights have been properly installed GAS/FUEL OIL SYSTEMS • The gas system pressure test has been conducted Connections between units are properly made with access as required The main fuel line has been properly connected and tested by a qualified tech- nician APPLIANCE OPERATING AND VENTING • All appliances are working properly 117 Appliance venting is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions Fresh air intakes are properly installed Whole house, kitchen and bath exhaust fan operation are correct • Fireplace chimney stack extension and roof cap have been installed in accord- ance with the manufacturer's instructions Air conditioner/heat pump is sized properly Air conditioner condensate line is properly trapped and terminates outside of the skirting MISCELLANEOUS • Installation/anchoring certificates or seals have been issued and installed (if required) • Owner's and operation manuals are available for all appliances • This installation manual is left with home Marriage line gasket has been installed and inspected 118 Index of Steps INTRODUCTION GETTING STARTED ...................................................... PG. 10 PREPARE THE SITE ...................................................... PG. 15 INSTALL FOOTINGS ..................................................... PG. 20 CONSTRUCT FOUNDATIONS ...................................... PG. 35 SETTHE HOME............................................................. PG. 38 COMPLETE MULTI -SECTION SET ............................... PG. 44 COMPLETE ROOF AND EXTERIOR WALLS ............... PG. 56 CONNECT CROSSOVERS ............................................ PG. 61 COMPLETE THE INTERIOR ......................................... PG. 72 INSTALL STABILIZING SYSTEM ................................. PG. 74 CONNECT UTILITIES....................................................PG. 95 PREPARE APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT ............... PG. 103 COMPLETE EXTERIOR WORK .................................... PG. 112 PREPARE HOME FOR OCCUPANCY .......................... PG. 115 COMPLETE INSTALLATION CHECKLIST...................PG. 116 119 APPENDIX A APPENDIX B Oversizing cooling equipment: a costly mistake The guidelines offer a simple look -up procedure to assist equipment specifiers, HVAC contractors, home installers, retailers, manufacturers, and electric utility staff select heat pump and air conditioner capacity for new manufactured homes. The guidelines were developed to help eliminate the all -too -common problem of choosing equipment with far more cooling capacity than the home needs.. Oversized HVAC equipment is recognized as a common industry problem that erodes energy efficiency and lowers customer satis tion. Consumers overpay in two ways. First, they are buying eqU has more cooling capacity and is more expensive than they neea. oecona, once installed, oversized equipment cycles on and off frequently, shortening equipment life, lowering efficiency, and increasing power bills. Oversized equipment also can lead to moisture problems within the home. ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR is a nationally recognized, voluntary labeling program designed to identify and promote energy -efficient homes, buildings, and products to consumers and business owners across the United States. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency is responsible for administering the ENERGY STAR for Homes program. An ENERGY STAR qualified home is at least 30% more energy efficient in its heating, cooling and water heating than a comparable home built to the 1993 Model Energy Code. This increased level of energy efficiency is met by successfully integrating an energy efficient building envelope (effective insulation, tight construction, advanced windows), energy efficient air distribution (air -tight, well -insulated ducts), and energy efficient equipment (space heating and cooling and hot water heating). ENERGY STAR qualified homes typically require less cooling capacity because their high insulation levels and tight construction slow the transfer of heat from outside into the home, and their tight air distribution systems minimize the loss of conditioned air from the ducts. 'Thermal provisions of the Manufactured Housing Construction and Safety Standards, Subpart F, Section §3280 How to use the sizing guidelines The sizing guidelines consist of a set of nine maps covering the continental U.S. and the Sizing Table contain- ing recommended cooling equipment sizes in tons. The maps are divided into counties. Contiguous counties that have the same sizing recommendations are combined into Sizing Groups.' The maps and Sizing Table are available on the Web at http://www.mhrahome.org and http://www.energystar.gov. Follow these steps to determine your recommended size: 1. Find the county where the home will be sited on the map and determine the corresponding Sizing Group number. 2. Find the row corresponding to the Sizing Group on the Sizing Table. The rows on the table are color - coded to match the colors on the map. 3. Determine the conditioned Floor Area of the home and read across the top row of the table locating the pair of columns containing that area. 4. To find the required cooling equipment capacity in tons for a heat pump or air conditioner, read down the column that corresponds to the Floor Area and across the row that corresponds to the Sizing Group. 5. The left-hand column in each pair represents the appropriate cooling equipment size for ENERGY STAR qualified homes. The right-hand column in each pair represents the size (in tons of cooling capacity) for homes built to the HUD -standards thermal requirements. Example: • An ENERGY STAR qualified home is to be installed in Richmond County near Ocala, Florida. • The map indicates that Richmond County is in a Sizing Group 50. • The home is a 28 ft. by 56 ft. multisection containing 1,568 square feet of conditioned living space (28 ft. x 56 ft.=1,568 sq. ft.). • Referring to the Sizing Table, read across the row labeled Sizing Group 50 and down the column containing 1,568 square feet (1,441 to 1,680). • Read down the left-hand (blue) column for an ENERGY STAR qualified home. • This home requires a 3 Ton heat pump. 'Some counties are divided into more than one sizing group. Disclaimer The values on the chart are intended as a guide for equipment selection. This information is not a substitute for proper evaluation and judg- ment by an equipment specifier. The cooling capacity estimates are based on typical home configurations and assumed design conditions. Actual sizing requirements may differ from the values on the chart. The Manufactured Housing Research Alliance and its members, the US Environmental Protection Agency, the Tennessee Valley Authority, the National Rural Electric Cooperative Association, sponsors of this work, assume no liability for errors in equipment sizing, selection, and installation. Sizing charts are available for other regions of the U.S. For information on obtaining sizing guidance for other areas, please visit the Manufactured Housing Research Alliance web site at: hftp://www.mhrahome.org. The Manufactured Housing Research Alliance developed the sizing charts. MHRA is a non-profit membership organization comprised of firms actively engaged in the manufactured housing business. Wrightsoft Corporation performed the engineering analysis. The technical basis for the values that appear on the chart is Right-JTh°, an Air Conditioning Contractors of America (ACCA)-endorsed software version of ACCA Manual J, Load Calculation for Residential Winter and Summer Air Conditioning, Seventh Edition. Copyright © 2005 Manufactured Housing Research Alliance All rights reserved. No portion of this chart may be reproduced, by any process or technique, without the express written permission of MHRA. Floor Area Up to 840 841 to 1,121. to 1,281 to 1,441 to 1,681 to 1,961 to 2,241 to 2,521 to 2,761 to (square feet) 1,120 1,280' 1,440 1,680 1,960 2,240 2,520 2,760 3,000 - PMW Sizing Group HUD ECM HUD D HUD HUD HUD HUD 0' HUD 0" HUD THUD HUD 1.5 TY1717M -.-- - r"--1 ri -2 2.- 1.5 2 2 2 2 2.5 1.5 Z5 5 1.5 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 _2.5, 2 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 11 E Li 1 2 2 2 2.5 F771 2. 2: 4 1 .5 .5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 1.5 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 : F 1:1 1 -1 - 2 2.5 2.5 1.25 1.5 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 11. :] 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 7 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 D 15 1'.-55 F1 1. 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 5 91 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 3 2.5 3 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2.5 10 1 1.5 1.5 1-5 L 2 2 r 1 .5 FLI 2 2.5 2.5 L-J, D Ll L HI 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 1 25 2.5 3 3 3 3 3.5 2 2 2.5 2A 1 12 15 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1 2 2 2.5 2*5 j 2.5 3 .6 E 13 5 L 3 3 3 3.5 F 3 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 ___J 3 3 ------ 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1 5 2 2 2 2 2 -7 2.5 3 3 3 1 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 -1 14j 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 1 j 2 2 2 2 2.5 r 3 3 3 3.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 i 1.5 2 2 2 2 2.5 3 3.5 16 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 1 3 3 3 3.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 i 3 3.5 3 4 17 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 1.5 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 4 18 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 19 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3 3.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 20 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3 3.5 3 4 3.5 4 21 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3 3.5 3 4 3.5 4 22 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 3.5 4 23 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3 3.5 3.6 4 3.5 4.5 24 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3 4 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 25 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3 3 3.5 3 4 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 26 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3 3 3.5 3 4 3.5 4.5 3.5 4.5 27 1.5 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3 3.5 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 3.5 5 28 1.5 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 3.5 5 29 1.5 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3 4 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 3.5 5 30 1.5 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3.5 4 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 4 5 31 1.5 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3 4 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 4 5 32 1.5 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3 4 3.5 4.5 3.5 4.5 3.5 5 33 1.5 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.6 3 4 3.5 4.5 3.5 4.6 4 '5 34 1.5 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 3.5 4.5 4 5 36 1.5 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3 3 3.5 3.6 4 3.5 4.5 3.5 5 4 5 36 1.5 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 3 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3 4.5 3.5 5 3.5 5.5 37 1.5 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3 3.5 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 4 5 4 5.5 38 1.5 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 3 2.5 3.5 3 3.5 3 4 3.5 4.5 3.5 5 3.5 5.5 39 1.5 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 3.5 5 4 5.5 40 1.5 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 4 5 4 5.5 41 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 4 4.5 4 5 42 2 2 2.5 2.5 4 5.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3.5 3.5 4 4 4 4.5 4 5 4.5 5.5 44 43: 3 4.5 3.5 4.5 3.5 5 1" 3.5 5.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 i 2 3 i 7' 2.5 3.5 3 4 1.5 2 2 2.5 L 2.5 2.5 L 2.5 3 _j 3 3.5 3 4 3.5 4.5 4 4.5 L''_j 4 5 LLj' 4 5.5 461.52.3.5 3 4 7-1 4.5 4.5 4 5 4 5.5 L ' 2 2 2 2.5 7 2.5 3 L 2.5 3 35 3.5 3.5 4 43.5 4.5 43,5 4.5 4 5 4 5.5 ,4 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5- 3 [71 2.5 3 3 3.5 3.5 4 4 4.5 4.5 4 . 5 "5' 4.5 5.5 48 3 2.5 3 1.5 2 2 2.5 2 m 6� 49 2.6 3.5 3 4 3 4.56 3,5 -5' 3.5 5.5 3.5 5.5 50 2 --4"--,, 5-. -5-, - 1.5 Y, 4- 3-.5-4.5 2 2 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 3 3 3.5 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 2 2 4 5 4 5.5 4 5.5 2.5 2.5 i5 3 2.5 52 3.5. 3.5 4 4 4. 4 5 45 5.6 4.55.5 - 1.5 2 02 2.5 2 3 2.5 3 M 2.5 3.5 3 4 3.5 45 A 9 r me.5 4.5 3.5 5 4 5.5- 3 3:5 3 4 3.5 4.5 4 5 4 5.5 4 6 1.5 2 2 2.5 2.-5 V3.. 25 3 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 2'5 3 3 3.5 35 4 4 4.5 4 5 4 5.5 4.5 6 2 2 2.5 2.5 = 2.5 3 3' 3 3 3.5 3,5 4 4 4.6 4 5 4.5 5.5 4.5 6 2 2 2. 2.5 2.5 -3'5 3.5 4 4 .5 4.5 5 3 3 3.5 5 6 1.5 2 5. -0-2 2.5 2 3 02.5 3.5 2.5 3.50 3 4 0 3.5 4.5 0 3.5 5 2 2 - " " --i -- -- --.. : --m 3.5, 5;5 4- 6 2 3 2.5 2.5 3.5 3 :3 2 2 2�5 3 2,5 3 3 4 3.5 4.. 4 5 4 5.. 4 6 A. 3 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 4 4 4.5 4.5 5 2 4.5 5.5 6 Ji 5 2.5 3 2.5 35 3 4 3.5 4.5 � - 1 4 5 4 5.5 4.5 6 4.5- 6.5 1.5 2.51 2 3 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 3 4.5 3.5 5 4 5.5 4 .6 4.5 6.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 25T -- -=---%:-_ W... - -1 3.5 3 4 3.5 4.5 4 5 4 5.5 4.5 6 4.5 6.6- 2 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3 3.5 3.5 4 4 45 4.5 5 4.5 5.5 -6 6, 6:5 2 25 2.5 3 2 2.5 2�5 3. 3 3.5 0 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 4 5 4. _5 4.5 - 6 - -2.5 3 3 3.5 3 -3.5 3.5 A 4 4.5 4.5 5.5 4.5 6 1 4.5 '6.5 5 7 2 2.5 ZZ, - - .5 3.5 4 4 4.5 4.5 5.5 5 6, 5 65 - 5. , 5 7 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3.5 4 4.5 0 4.5 5 5 5.5 5 6 5.5 6.5 5.5 7 2.5 2.5 0 2 0 -3 -3� 35 3.5 4.5 5 45 4.5 2.5 3 3 3.5, 3.5 3 . 5 4 4 A.5 5 6.6 5 7 - _5 6 5.5 6.5 51, 7' 6 8 2. 3 4.5 5.5 3 3.5 L 3 27 33i 13 .9 1 - 23 27 26 —23 u t a r 15- Men HRa lute J�'y 21 17 A. 27 C o f o r a "'Id 0 M 28 9 oa 40 `118 12 '27 40 0 49 21 25- 10 xh�y' -21 15 Arizona 23 26 5 s- 23" 26 39 17 2 Savo 32 N e w M eL%-i c 0 45 0 20 39 54 25 35 35 32 32 .P� 36 N AV Washington r 2 5r d� 9 24 19 1'5 23_ K 1°1 13 •,�� �e 27 �.. 16- 24 33 �.8 19 —21 24 -16 M0nta,_a 19" 11 1"5; e� s 21 41. o Oregon' 1 w_ 23 a ?J /27- Idaho 21-dam ---- I 33 29 15 ._ 19. M 26 _ 23 M 33 +30 15 15 'e 21 7 � s Wy0miYig9' a 23 L' 23 rj 10 .. 13 10 1VIa J n e � y�14 � 12— h} GiHvwd- Vermont k 1"'. Rka C ® OaLvJ Y. 1 �., 12X New . Y,o r k New Hampsh e 12 ra m.n� Hatm� m 1 xuum".�g Jw 6 m ?IQ Ucw 11� � Im S9i .' [aw Massachusetts I. �16 M�mmo w°M m>�M t,, ,�-r . �, Ra"ne ' �• 1 1516 - LM,gv 1 VYev I�IIwJ iI ��fl /i�� fmr�u 66n •Neq �/� 6 neNnd\] F.. Rimed Immpkty< 4�\,\J1T ��y�u. 15 20 xm d ae 14 15'' k 'Co e 11- ode island 1;g a 18 45f J 1°5 V ,i5 9 n ti. '4 19 �� 9 _ o 0 nmrw �� `- ° ly "FPennstyl 13 22 16 A 20° 1 O �j C iLid ', Siptla LLw� V/<tr fWv �T v 25 nRaaa . Jml omu n<m 23 ® - New Jersey 20 � 6mLa1W nttrd "lase f. S 6 -23 **+o- 0 Mm� ��� ° �� < u,mn 6' �• Delaware Q'mJ �I RiMe .'g � �� II SJY P�v Xmee :{tlx - mwwak " ° • _ ��\tea ,'- Ren '1 P�ygyn® Ptt �i� ° lvtcn Rae., nmwe j Pc<Wgmo MaNv Self" �e 1 Mma f wg ° WeS nl ! 4� °nmp ,os< ." 25 a 17< AwaL+ In<lu o { —a. i ■..y■� <+.ea N.6 itrIJF Ne6xa OlbvLsm Nn • 9wm �rc gem v •� Ame14 x°R< - I�F�� 'v\l�yr�maq��R`'l""'w �Oxg �i4mw\ RrunfeAljrvaeOn�g 2/7 y.--s.+.� Na(a ��A e•••.• BeAlotJ C<mpL<II �t 61no0 �^% V <I' Nabrry UioWlde 1<Wn' YM:?vvll • I(f ���",,,y Cdv4we Wtict 2 • .�'4'<0 �v>,a ru,,;, r�tlm 26enm<.kt urtmo. nml nn.yw�k = ,29r sWmmam - .j9 • °1 Pmt 1 •i0 - tm_ �_�aY 1 O 1 1 �d� � B„� B✓,:s �, 1 a " 2G 24 18°I:ba v��.L 4Gw "� 20 Ne4s ShnCv Gelb Eby t1 AS � k`"+ tTl Ire" TIdR � � � fnva m xNor th Dakota>�• vYahY hnH,L I(b.", Smmim Ihwva 10 23 L�t 21 i 2U-15; — f a.� Minnes-otall— BSouth Dakota Aa flR, x� a-rB 23 .ae..k o sL.� Yrha.f.W'ure Rew�M ' Wau -25 x mm xNr tiCh ilvkm rN.,,f.n. yn� IlvTtn H®ab I:NFhm B� Uuxh ��i°f Le Suv Rra vp C"w. a�hi wab>•h Csa�Wm m k Is Sardsv '26 L¢e NwfT I9R�. tvvq a]w.=Bee Fau wino Sale 1avf:e wua h 31 "a 1 2,0�, >lenem Awe Mad hmd xWu,e ilvu.u. 2: i_ TW TM� A"RA^ Ilurtmn T L.m (laY, Ltldimv l�r M"•mm a.,Nl tfi"W Iiwsl wwN.R e 'i` 23—i . •- �� ---�� Saar, ns <LY AMA -1- 7 <i.,m Fbltl Ovd,u" Armen S,!•Aw mllrmva YM, {{ - . 20 PeRim M'�.. 23 R 25 <� 0�� �.� a d�a x� , o B,w a, ,m a27 maa c."x xa� a.a � Bha x..t B«wma r„n.>,e 1Tmov N e b r a s k a SmmBhrt eismR T.w Bmm Wry Ccw Hwxe Thy, Bye L R M b 5 , C�,.Ntl ltn•0 Cnve Bane SRp . Afrn�L � • w m.m Nmq 26 25 "' 23 24 " �Tm a d� B �n 35�_ x 2 31— 25 `h25 A 26 2 R� �27 h>� , 6" _ `�` 3,5.. L� �. B.m 29, M i ,S s ou r i M. !t� a� N°Ha. 31 -^35—, Mww R.w R,.39. SBY tuxY e.T 28 a �_ 39` 7- 39�� fl+mltm Revov i� � � f F 31,�� � w v � S nv,e 26 r w, 35 k ® R"� 28 Buis R m� �m ,�� 35� 4,ma 29 MvYe Bvvld. 39 c f 7? 7-12 0---% isconsm 4 14 15 mitfligaii 16- -18 20 12 . Gm -2S� -.2 22. 2 rmnu 22 - IS 22 18- 22 -20- F,23-- 26- 2 20 ca dogg 2 Pakls �22- 7-2.5 S.-, 25'- A.—Hanerkt Fqy° 'k.. 20 "'Ohio Illinois Indiana3 26 jjj 2 R� n�- - o- -23 FbuxB cr— —j 2. 22 z "M f 27 ,35 5 Tot� �entuc ---26 25 IlumMldt / /' itidly v i 15 Tf+ �' I.nssen � Nashc.: Meunmim s�nn fr � u, m= 59 s, yy: Yuba+ ,1'xrM �_A slam Napa Yd ate" �u1` C—cmm P ta" 33 cnammu sn�r,ndn m,..T„ s Sao 1 o a u \ hlinerd tinmN. `24 M �• \ s�dsw�, •�5 � Aiwu cmm�smm. Cl.,. Suns, 3lmhi,o Venlma s's California s- Di ' I27 Ney'vada Nye 1Joculu 53 i 4 APPENDIX C The following designs are presented as two basic alternatives: The first is to present the minimum shutters that are permitted by the codes when such shutters are required. The requirements of the 2003 International Residential Code (IRC) and the 2001 Florida Building Code (FBC) are presented. They permit the use of minimum 7/16" Rated Sheathing as shutters to protect against the impact of windbome debris. Check with local building departments for verification or clarification of requirements. The second approach provides some design details for stronger and stiffer shutters than provided for by the code - minimum designs. It should be noted that these designs were developed prior to the adoption of specific standards for shutter designs by any U.S. codes. The supports detailed for these shutters meet code requirements when mounted according to the specifications in Table R301.2.1.2. The mounting brackets for the masonry block structures have been tested for design wind loads but have not been impact or cyclic tested because they were developed as design guides before these standards were developed. 1. Code -Minimum Shutter Design: The 2003 International Residential Code (IRC), Section R301.2.1.2, provides that "windows in buildings located in windbome debris regions shall have glazed openings protected from windbome debris or the building shall be designed as a partially enclosed building in accordance with the International Building Code. Glazed opening protection for windbome debris shall meet the requirements of the Large Missile Test of ASTM E 1996 and of ASTM E 1886 referenced therein. Exception: Wood structural panels with a minimum thickness of 7/16 inch (11.1 mm) and a maximum span of 8 feet (2438 mm) shall be permitted for opening protection in one- and two-story buildings. Panels shall be precut to cover the glazed openings with attachment hardware provided. Attachments shall be provide in accordance with Table R301.2.1.2 or shall be designed to resist the components and cladding loads determined in accordance with the provisions of the International Building Code." TABLE R301.2.1.2 WINDBORNE DEBRIS PROCTECTION FASTENING SCHEDULE FOR WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELSa1b,c Fastener Spacing Panel 4 ft < Panel 6 ft < Panel Fastener Type Span < 4 ft Span <_ 6 ft Span 5 8 ft 2-1/2" #6 Wood Screws 16" 12" 9" 2-1/2" #8 Wood Screws 16" 16" 12" a. This table is based on 130 mph wind speeds and a 33-foot mean roof height. b. Fasteners shall be installed at opposing ends of the wood structural panel. c. Where screws are attached to masonry or masonry/stucco, they shall be attached utilizing vibration -resistant anchors having a minimum ultimate withdrawal capacity of 490 pounds. IN ac>ucv ru>x 0 0 9 . �,���PF Section R202 defines a Windbome Debris Region as any "areas within hurricane -prone regions within one mile of the coastal mean high water line where the basic wind speed is 110 mph or greater; or where the basic wind speed is equal to or greater than 120 mph; or Hawaii." maps Alternatively, Section 1606.1.4 of the 2001 Florida Building Code: "In wndbome debris regions, exterior glazing that receives positive pressure in the lower 60 feet in buildings shall be assumed to be openings unless such glazing is impact resistant or protected with an impact resistant covering meeting the requirements of SSTD 12, ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E 1996, or Miami -Dade PA 201, 202 and 203 referenced therein as follows: 1. Glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade shall meet the provisions of the Small Missile Test. 2. Glazed openings located more than 30 feet above grade shall meet the provision of the Small Missile Test. Exception: Wood structural panels with a minimum thickness of 7/16 inch and maximum panel span of 8 feet shall be permitted for opening protection in one- and two-story buildings. Panels shall be precut to cover the glazed openings with attachment hardware provided. Attachment shall be designed to resist the components and cladding loads deter- mined in accordance with Table 1606.213. Attachment in accordance with Table 1606.1.4 is permitted for buildings with mean roof height of 33 feet or less where wind speeds do not exceed 130 mph." TABLE 1606.1.4 WINDBORNE DEBRIS PROTECTION FASTENING SCHEDULE FOR WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS Fastener Spacing (in.)a,b Panel 2 ft< Panel 4 ft< Panel Fastener Type Span 5 2 ft Span < 4 ft Span < 6 If 6 ft< Panel Span < 8 ft 2-1/2 #6 Wood Screwc 16 _ 16 12 9 -- 2-1/2 #8 Wood Screwc 16 16 16 12 — Double -Headed Nailsd 12 6 4 3 a. This table is based on a maximum wind speed of 130 mph and mean roof height of 33 feet or less. b. Fasteners shall be installed at opposing ends of the wood structural panel. c. Where screws are attached to masonry or masonry/stucco, they shall be attached using vibration -resistant anchors having a minimum withdrawal capacity of 490 lb. d. Nails shall be 1 Od common or 12d box double -headed nails. Section 1606.1.5 defines a Windbome Debris Region as: 1. Area within one mile of the coastal mean high water line where the basic wind speed is 110 mph or greater. (See map) 2. Areas where the basic wind speed is 120 mph or greater except from the eastern border of Franklin Count to the Florida -Alabama line where the region includes area only within 1 mile of the coast. See mapj \`\X,%►ViINI 1I/// GP ` aclucU, UR .2_ 00 i,9�OP TEN Hurricane Shutter Designs 1 1 4 2. Stronger, Stiffer Designs The following design pages describe how to construct stronger, stiffer shutters for attachment to wood and masonry walls. The masonry attachments were designed prior to the adoption of specific test standards for shutter designs by U.S. codes. The shutters have been tested to resist the design wind loads and impacts but the attachments to masonry have not been impact or cyclic -load tested. The masonry attachment details are therefore supplied as guides in developing individual designs. Most building codes include provisions for storm shutters. Earlier code had provisions for a deflection of less than the shutter span (in inches) divided by 30 (for instance, a 40-inch span should not bend more than 40/30 = 1.33 inches when the wind blows). They also should bend less than 2 inches maximum and should remain at least one inch away from the window when under full wind force. The easiest designs are those that simply cover the opening with a wood structural panel. In wood -frame construc- tion, panels can be nailed over the openings when a hurricane approaches. Buildings made with concrete blocks, however, require advance preparation. In some cases, stiffeners may be necessary to limit deflection of the shutter against the glass. Stiffeners function best if the 2 x 4s are on the outside of the shutter and oriented with the narrow edge against the shutter. Tables 1 and 2 and Figure1 on the following page apply to most of the designs, and are referenced accordingly. These APA hurricane shutter designs are based on pressures associated with a 3-second gust wind speed of 120 mph. Building codes are currently being reviewed for possible changes. Before constructing shutters, therefore, it is important to check with your local building department for an update on current code requirements. Note: The shutter designs shown herein will provide significant protection from hurricane -force winds. This publication contains recommendations to serve as a guide only. It does not include all possible shutter, anchor and fastening systems, and the installer must adjust all dimensions to compensate for particular installations and hardware used. These shutter designs by no means represent all possible workable designs and can always be upgraded to provide even greater margins of safety and protection. All shutter designs herein are intended to be temporary, and mounted and removed from outside the building. All designs are based on wind pressure capacities only. While the design wind pressures used are based on ASCE 7-95, the building owner/installer must still carefully evaluate each system and then, if neces- sary, make any modifications consistent with good design and building practices. DESIGN 1 SHUTTERS FOR WOOD -FRAME BUILDINGS DESIGN 2 SHUTTERS FOR MASOHRY BLOCK STRUCTURES BARREL BOLT LATCH SUPPORTS DESIGN 3 SHUTTERS FOR MASONRY BLOCK STRUCTURES STEEL OR ALUMINUM ANGLE AND SCREW SUPPORTS DESIGN 4 SHUTTERS FOR MASONRY BLOCK STRUCTURES SHUTTERS ATTACHED TO OUTSIDE WALL WITH PERMANENTLY \ xW11111 r/ MOUNTED BRACKETS \C?P• p n.:'ge`rirr DESIGN 5 SHUTTERS FOR MASONRY BLOCK STRUCTU$ FOR OPENINGS WIDER THAN 8 FEET _ AGAICU UR i 'hm �s• Form No. T450E ■ © 2004 APA — The Engineered Wood Association :apawood.org Hurricane Shutter Designs 5 FIGURE 1 SHUTTER STIFFENER ATTACHMENT - IF REQUIRED APA Structural Panel �. #22x4 Cut if desired I I I I I I I 4, Strength axis 3/16" x 3" Lag screws with fender washers I N M,q �•' D •..� � f�/ram , °•.. 12d Nails 6" o.c. •`. Cn . a AGRICU • , UR 00 ■ © ■ Form No. T450E 2004 APA - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org TABLE 1 MAXIMUM SPAN WITHOUT STIFFENERS APA Panel Approximate Span Rating Weight (Ib./ft.2) Maximum Shutter Span Approximate Deflection (in.) at 120 mph Design Wind Speed at 15-ft. Height 32/16 1.5 30 0.5 40/20 2 --------- 36 0.5 48/24 2.4 48 0.9 48 oc 3.6 72 1.5 TABLE 2 ESTIMATED DEFLECTION AT 120 MPH DESIGN WIND SPEED AT 15-FT. HEIGHT FOR SHUTTERS -WITH 2 X 4s AT 16 INCHES-o:c. APA Panel Approximate Span Rating Weight (Ib./ft.z) 24 36 Shutter Span (in.) 48 60 72 84 96 32/16 2.5 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.8 - 40/20 2.9 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.7 1.1 48/24 3.4 - - 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.6 1.0 48 oc 4.6 - - 0.1 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.9 DESIGN 7 W �, 11, It l! tff MW1,11i mull, This design from APA — The Engineered Wood Association describes how to construct structural panel shutters for attachment to wood -frame buildings. Steps to Constructing Shutters 1. Review Tables 1 and 2 in the Design Considerations section to determine if stiffeners are needed. Attach stiffener as shown in Figures 1 and IA. 2. Cut APA wood structural panels with adequate edge overlap to receive nails. Orient long panel axis (strength a)ds) of the panel as shown in Figures 1 and 1A. 3. Use a long brad or finishing nail to locate the framing behind the wood siding. The nails used to attach the shims and the shutters must hit the framing to be fully effective. 4. Nail shims to the framing with 12d nails. Use 16d nails for shims over 3/4 inch thick For spans up to 5 feet, space the nails 6 inches o.c. at each shim. For spans over 5 feet, space nails 4 inches o.c. at each shim. (Figures 1B and 10 5. Attach the shutters with double -headed nails for ease of later removal. (Figures 1B and 1C) Use 12d nails for shutters up to 3/4 inch thick and 16d nails for shutters over 3/4 inch thick. For spans up to 5 feet, space the nails 6 inches o.c. at each end of the shutter panel. For spans over 5 feet, space nails 4 inches o.c. at each end of the shutter panel. Nailing the panel on all four sides, instead of just the two ends, will further limit deflection and maximize strength. 6. Any permanently installed hardware, shims or fastening devices must be installed using standard/acceptable methods of waterproofing. All abandoned holes must be sealed. 7. After fabrication each shutter should be marked for orientation and location to simplify installation. 8. If shims are to be left in place, use galvanized nails and finish like siding or exterior trim. `X%�IIIIIIII/// �,N.�V IN AG C 00 OF T FIGURE 1A SHUTTER ATTACHMENT — VIEW FROM OUTSIDE APA Structure #22x4s(if i Strength axis 12d Double -he (nails at 4" o.c. Cut if desired FIGURE 1 B SHUTTER ATTACHMENT — TOP Siding 12d Nails 12d Double -headed nails at 6" o.c. (nails at 4" o.c.r a` if shutter is over 5' long) of €' � Header Shim' Finish wall r Flashing and caulk Shutter Interior casing Glass Alternate Wind Protection for Windows and Doors Plywood storm cover See table below for plywood specification For openings wider th locate storm cover bo within 30'of vertical, and install 7P clips be lumber stiffeners as s Fasten plywood storm to door vertical framb 1-'10x2 1/2'penetsa side of stiffener and 8 2x4 S)R*2stiffeners within 6• of top and bottom of windows and 16'0.G MaxJ `�,p,V 1111 IMiie.; For openings wider tl locate storm cover ba within 30'of vertical and iastai171' clips be lumber stiffeners as s Plywood storm cover See table below for plywood specification Fasten plywood storm to door vertical frame 1-*I0x2 llz pent sa side of stiffener and 8 Zx4SYP.'2stiffeners within 6•of top and bottom of windows and 16'0.0 OWax.) Wind Protection for Windows Wind Protection for Doors Locate plywood seams over center of 2x4 stiffener. Gistall plywood storm cover with face grain placed horizontal. Typical stiffener installation detail. Typicalscrew installation. Window openhW width. Wh7dow,amblwau framing behind .over. Bottom plate Install plywood storm cover with face grain placed horizontal. Typical stiffener installation detail below. Typical screw LwtaHatlon. Door Opening Width. Locate plywood seams over center of 2x4 stiffeners. Doorjamb/wall framing behind storm cover. Alternate Wind Protection for Windows and Doors *10x21/2'penet wood screw with 1 1/2'dia steel washer. Plywood storm cover (min.) 11127 Metal tube%ylinder min. Window/door Window/door frame Jamb/wall stud SECTIONA A Note. Installer must locate wood screws 3/4' +/- from edge of window/door frame and must verify that wood screw placement properly engages lumber framing. Gp,VIN • ,�catcu, trR U ,0 g Notes: 4 Plywood storm cover must extend extend min. X beyond edge of window/door frame as shown PR•-1r; Rubber washer. or plywood spacer: Exterior siding. / \ I Stud or lumber blocking (min. 2x2 spf) 2x4 stiffener entire width of storm cover. 2' n� Plywood —� storm cover. IJNX., w 6'O.0 3/'x3 81/2'!ag (typ. entire length with 11/2' dia. of stiffener). washer at each SECTION B B end of stiffener. Wind Protection Details PLYWOOD STORM COVER SPECIFICATIONS Max. opening Minimum Span width thickness index Up to 48" 1/2" 2410 49"to 84" 518" 32116 85"to 120" 314" 48124 Wind Protection Exterior Sheathing 1. All decorative shutters must be removed prior to installing protective covers. 2. When openings exceed 84" replace 2"x4" stiffeners with 2"x6" SPF #2 stiffeners. 3. After use, recommend that all sheathing be retained for possible reuse. Caulk any nail holes in the siding to prevent moisture from penetrating the exterior wall. 4.On bay windows, 3" extension beyond edge of window is not applicable, storm covering is to be butted up at angled areas of bays. Covering may have a maximum gap of 1/4" between pieces. Wind Protection Exterior Sheathing 1. All decorative shutters must be removed prior to installing protective covers. 2. When openings exceed 84" replace 2"x4" stiffeners with 2"x6" SPF #2 stiffeners. 3. After use, recommend that all sheathing be retained for possible reuse. Caulk any nail holes in the siding to prevent moisture from penetrating the exterior wall. 4.On bay windows, 3" extension beyond edge of window is not applicable, storm covering is to be butted up at angled areas of bays. Covering may have a maximum gap of 1/4" between pieces. APPENDIX D MMH1LU Mdnli =ndU.-Afi„g&UP, t o JAN 14 2009 ao Housing Alert cL cL Federal Manufactured Home Construction M v And Safety Standards HUD Suspends Enforcement of Ground Anchor and Manufactured Pier Galvanization Requirements On Monday, January 12, HUD informed MHI it will be suspending national enforcement of the galvanization requirements for anchor systems and manufactured piers that would have become effective February 2, under the new Model Manufactured Home Installation Standards (MMHIS), until the Manufactured Housing Consensus Committee reviews the matter further. HUD is taking this action in response to an appeal made by MHI based on the lack of a demonstrated need for such a requirement to apply to the installation of all manufactured housing nationwide. MHI has maintained that weatherization requirements for anchor and pier systems should be based on local and regional conditions rather than a one size fits all approach as currently contained in the MMHIS. MHI has therefore been in discussions with HUD, requesting states be allowed to determine what, if any, minimum galvanization requirements are warranted in their own jurisdictions until the MHCC is able to recommend more practical standards that account for regional climatic and soil differences. The following is the e-mail sent yesterday from Bill Matchneer, Associate Deputy Assistant Secretary, Office of Regulatory Affairs and Manufactured Housing, to SAA's and Primary Inspection Agencies (PIA). 'As requested by MHI, HUD has decided to temporarily suspend national enforcement of the weatherization and corrosion protection requirements for piers and anchor systems found in CFR 3285.308 and 402 due to take effect on February 2, 2009. As requested by the industry in June 2008, these requirements are currently under review by a workgroup of the Manufactured Housing Consensus Committee (MHCC). HUD will reconsider its decision to suspend enforcement of these weatherization and corrosion protection requirements once the MHCC has voted on any recommendations received from the current review process. During rulemaking, HUD was not presented with a known history of actual failures of ground anchors or piers due to corrosion. Therefore, HUD is comfortable taking this step to help the industry cope with a period of severe economic distress. HUD reminds all concerned, however, that these weatherization and corrosion protection issues should have been more fully addressed by the affected parties during the rulemaking process. While HUD has decided to temporarily suspend national enforcement of the weatherization and corrosion protection requirements in CFR 3285.308 and 402, the states are free to make their own decisions with regard to galvanization or other weatherization and corrosion protection requirements for pier and anchor systems. Primary Inspection Agencies are asked to advise the individual manufacturers they supervise of this decision.' If you have any questions, please contact Jeff Inks at jinksCci�mfghome. org.